213
Tivoli ® Decision Support for z/OS ® Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration Version 1.7 SH19-6901-08

Network Performance Feature Installation and Administrationpublib.boulder.ibm.com/tividd/td/TDS390/SH19-6901-08/en_US/PDF/DRLN9.pdf · Network Performance Feature Installation and

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    37

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Tivoli® Decision Support for z/OS®

Network Performance Feature

Installation and Administration

Version 1.7

SH19-6901-08

���

Tivoli® Decision Support for z/OS®

Network Performance Feature

Installation and Administration

Version 1.7

SH19-6901-08

���

Note

Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices” on page 181″.

Ninth Edition (November 2004)

This edition applies to version 1, release 7 of Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS (program number 5698-A07) and to

all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions.

This edition replaces SH19-6901-07.

© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1993, 2004. All rights reserved.

Note to U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights—Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule

Contract with IBM Corporation.

Contents

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

Who should read this book . . . . . . . . . ix

What this book contains . . . . . . . . . . ix

Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS library . . . . x

Using LookAt to look up message explanations . xi

Accessing publications online . . . . . . . xii

Ordering publications . . . . . . . . . . xii

Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

Tivoli technical training . . . . . . . . . . xii

Contacting IBM Software Support . . . . . . . xii

Determine the business impact of your problem xiii

Describe your problem and gather background

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv

Submit your problem to IBM Software Support xiv

Searching knowledge bases . . . . . . . . xiv

Search the information center on your local

system or network . . . . . . . . . . xiv

Search the Internet . . . . . . . . . . xiv

Obtaining fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Updating support information . . . . . . . xv

Conventions used in this book . . . . . . . . xvi

Typeface conventions . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Changes in this edition . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Chapter 1. Introducing the Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS Network

Performance feature . . . . . . . . . 1

Meeting users’ needs . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Implementing the solution . . . . . . . . . . 2

Selecting required data in Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Defining the network environment . . . . . . . 6

Understanding Network Performance feature tasks . 7

Chapter 2. Planning . . . . . . . . . . 9

Understanding the planning process . . . . . . 9

Planning for installation . . . . . . . . . . 10

Planning for components . . . . . . . . . . 11

Understanding environment information . . . . 13

Maintaining the environment information . . . 14

Understanding resource information . . . . . 14

Sources of resource data . . . . . . . . 15

Describing resources . . . . . . . . . 15

Grouping resources . . . . . . . . . . 16

Defining synonym names . . . . . . . . 18

Defining application synonyms . . . . . 18

Defining NCP synonyms . . . . . . . 19

Defining cross-domain or cross-network

connection synonyms . . . . . . . . 19

Including resources in availability processing 19

Understanding resource connections . . . . 20

Establishing service-level objectives . . . . 20

Understanding threshold information . . . . . 21

Understanding period information . . . . . . 22

Understanding schedule information . . . . . 24

Understanding product ID information . . . . 26

Understanding code converter information . . . 27

Basic alert code converter tables . . . . . 27

Generic alert code converter tables . . . . 28

Session failure code converter . . . . . . 29

Planning tasks for each component . . . . . . 30

Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Describing resources . . . . . . . . . 30

Grouping resources . . . . . . . . . . 30

Including resources . . . . . . . . . . 30

Creating synonym names . . . . . . . . 31

Establishing service objectives . . . . . . 31

Creating schedules . . . . . . . . . . 31

Customizing NetView . . . . . . . . . 31

Special considerations for cross-connection

resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

NetView FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

SMF record type . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Session failure . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

RTM response time . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Describing resources . . . . . . . . . 33

Grouping resources . . . . . . . . . . 33

Creating synonym names . . . . . . . . 33

Establishing service objectives . . . . . . 33

Customizing NetView . . . . . . . . . 34

NPM transit time . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Describing resources . . . . . . . . . 35

Grouping resources . . . . . . . . . . 35

Creating synonym names . . . . . . . . 35

Establishing service objectives . . . . . . 35

Customizing NPM . . . . . . . . . . 36

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Line utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Verifying threshold setting . . . . . . . 37

Customizing NPM . . . . . . . . . . 38

NCP utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Describing resources . . . . . . . . . 38

Grouping resources . . . . . . . . . . 38

Creating synonym names . . . . . . . . 38

Customizing NPM . . . . . . . . . . 39

NPM internal utilization . . . . . . . . . 39

NPM name . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Collect interval . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Customizing NPM . . . . . . . . . . 39

PU utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

NV/SM utilization . . . . . . . . . . . 39

NetView name . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Customizing NetView . . . . . . . . . 40

NEO utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Describing resources . . . . . . . . . 40

iii

||

||||||||||||||||||||||

Creating synonym names . . . . . . . . 40

Verifying threshold setting . . . . . . . 40

Customizing NPM . . . . . . . . . . 41

NTRI utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Describing resources . . . . . . . . . 42

Creating synonym names . . . . . . . . 42

Customizing NPM . . . . . . . . . . 42

Frame Relay utilization . . . . . . . . . 42

Describing resources . . . . . . . . . 43

Creating synonym names . . . . . . . . 43

Customizing NPM . . . . . . . . . . 43

LAN utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Customizing NPM . . . . . . . . . . 43

ODLC utilization . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Describing resources . . . . . . . . . 44

Creating synonym names . . . . . . . . 44

Customizing NPM . . . . . . . . . . 44

VTAM utilization . . . . . . . . . . . 44

X.25 utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Describing resources . . . . . . . . . 45

Creating synonym names . . . . . . . . 45

Verifying threshold setting . . . . . . . 45

Customizing NPM . . . . . . . . . . 46

SNMP routers utilization . . . . . . . . . 46

Customizing NPM . . . . . . . . . . 47

Chapter 3. Installing the Network

Performance feature . . . . . . . . . 49

Installing the feature . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Changing the dialog parameters . . . . . . . 49

Installing Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Chapter 4. Administering Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS and the

Network Performance feature . . . . . 55

Administering resource information . . . . . . 55

Administration dialog direct-edit method . . . 56

Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Disadvantages . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Network administration dialog . . . . . . . 56

Administering threshold information . . . . . 57

Administering period tables . . . . . . . . 57

Administering the schedule table . . . . . . 57

Administering the product ID table . . . . . 58

Administering code converter tables . . . . . 58

Chapter 5. Working with the Network

Performance feature Administration

dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Understanding the need for the network

administration dialog . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Network administration dialog functions . . . . 61

Work table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Loading data into the work table . . . . . 63

Updating the NW_RESOURCE table . . . . 64

Exporting data . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Performance considerations . . . . . . . 64

STATMON loader . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Resource defaults . . . . . . . . . . 65

Definition rules . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Database update . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Database loader . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Overview of administration dialog tasks . . . . . 67

Administration tasks with STATMON data . . . 67

Administration tasks with data from an external

source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Working with STATMON data . . . . . . . . 68

Producing resource data using STATMON . . . 69

Loading STATMON data into the work table . . 69

Changing resource information . . . . . . . 73

Updating the database . . . . . . . . . . 73

Loading data from multiple domains into

NW_RESOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Loading STATMON data from the first domain 76

Loading STATMON data from the second

domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Changing resource data . . . . . . . . . . 77

Loading data from the database . . . . . . 79

Modifying resource information . . . . . . 80

Displaying resources . . . . . . . . . . 81

Using the Search1 function key . . . . . . . 82

Using the Search2 function key . . . . . . . 83

Using the Change function key . . . . . . . 85

Deleting individual resource entries . . . . . 86

Using the save command . . . . . . . . . 86

Using the deleteall command . . . . . . . 87

Changing individual resource entries . . . . . 87

Changing application data . . . . . . . 90

Changing NCP resource data . . . . . . 92

Changing line resource data . . . . . . . 93

Changing cluster resource data . . . . . . 94

Changing cross-connection resource data . . 95

Changing group resource data . . . . . . 96

Changing local resource data . . . . . . 97

Changing switched resource data . . . . . 98

Verifying resource data . . . . . . . . . 98

Updating the database . . . . . . . . . . 99

Adding resource data to NW_RESOURCE . . . . 99

Adding resource data using the editing function 100

Adding resource data using STATMON . . . 100

Loading data from an external source into

NW_RESOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Producing resource data using an external

source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Setting defaults for external data . . . . . . 103

Loading external data into the work table . . . 104

Updating the database . . . . . . . . . 105

Exporting data from the NW_RESOURCE table 105

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Understanding the sample network . . . . . . 109

Administration tasks for the sample data . . . 110

Loading the resource data for domain 1 . . . . 112

Gathering network resource data . . . . . . 112

iv Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Setting the resource default values and loading

the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Modifying resource data for domain 1 . . . . . 116

Changing the NCP resource data . . . . . . 116

Changing application resources environment

data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Changing resource data to group lines and

clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Changing the cross-connection resource

environment data . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Updating the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Updating the network environment for domain 2 133

Changing domain 2 environment data and

updating the database . . . . . . . . . 136

Defining complex network environments . . . . 136

Deleting the sample data . . . . . . . . . 139

Chapter 7. Customizing NetView and

NPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Customizing NetView . . . . . . . . . . 141

Determining NetView customization tasks . . . 141

nv1—Define SMF logging in NetView . . . . 142

nv2—Collect NetView session awareness data 142

nv3—Log NetView session awareness data to

SMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

nv4—Reduce the CPU and storage utilization in

the session monitor . . . . . . . . . . 143

nv5—Collect session statistics for active sessions 143

nv6—Collect RTM data in NetView session

monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

nv7—Log NetView session monitor RTM data to

SMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

nv8—Collect RTM data and log to SMF . . . 143

nv9—Define RTM performance classes . . . . 143

nv10—Customize cluster controllers for RTM 144

nv11—Collect session monitor utilization data 144

nv12—Start and stop hardware monitor logging 144

nv13—Collect session failure data in NetView

session monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

nv14—Activate the network asset management

function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

nv15—Collect configuration data . . . . . . 144

Customizing NPM . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Determining NPM customization tasks . . . . 145

npm1—SMF logging . . . . . . . . . . 146

npm2—Log session interval records to SMF . . 146

npm3—NPM collect interval . . . . . . . 146

npm4—Define the base interval . . . . . . 149

npm5—Define the interval synchronization . . 149

npm6—Define the session collect interval . . . 149

npm7—Collect network data . . . . . . . 150

npm8—Define NCP to NPM . . . . . . . 150

npm9—Collect network data . . . . . . . 150

The START COLLECT command . . . . . 150

The NETCOLL command . . . . . . . 151

npm10—Enable network collection . . . . . 151

npm11—Verify line speed . . . . . . . . 151

npm12—Collect transit time . . . . . . . 151

npm13—Define NPM APPL statements . . . . 152

npm14—Define transit-time objective . . . . 152

npm15—Collect session data for each resource 152

npm16—Enable LAN data collection . . . . 153

npm17—Define LAN Managers . . . . . . 153

npm18—Define the LAN collection interval . . 153

npm19—Collect LAN bridge data . . . . . 155

npm20—Collect LAN segment data . . . . . 155

npm21—Enable VTAM data collection . . . . 155

npm22—Changing the VTAM interval . . . . 156

npm23—Collect VTAM data . . . . . . . 156

npm24—Define routers to NPM . . . . . . 156

npm25—Collect network data for SNMP routers 157

The IPCOLL command . . . . . . . . 157

Chapter 8. Testing and maintaining

the Network Performance feature . . . 159

Testing the Network Performance feature . . . . 159

Collecting data . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Generating reports . . . . . . . . . . 159

Evaluating test data . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Checking SMF records . . . . . . . . . 160

Moving the feature into production . . . . . . 162

Collecting data in production . . . . . . . 163

Purging data . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Creating reports in production . . . . . . 164

Performing maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 164

Keeping resource information current . . . . 164

Performing maintenance with STATMON 164

Performing maintenance with an external

source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Appendix A. Sample STATMON Inputs

and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

VTAMLST input to STATMON . . . . . . . 167

STATMON output . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Appendix B. External Data File Format 171

Appendix C. Using the DRLENR2X

User Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Appendix D. List of abbreviations . . 179

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Contents v

vi Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Figures

1. The need for a network management product 1

2. Organizing and presenting network data . . . 2

3. Environment information . . . . . . . . 6

4. Network Performance feature tasks . . . . . 7

5. Role of planning . . . . . . . . . . . 9

6. Basic component planning process . . . . . 12

7. Resource grouping example . . . . . . . 17

8. Resource grouping and alternate resource

grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

9. Reports with changing NCP names . . . . 19

10. Synonym name for changing NCP names 19

11. NW_THRESHOLD format . . . . . . . 22

12. Example SPECIAL_DAY table . . . . . . 22

13. Example DAY_OF_WEEK table . . . . . . 23

14. Example PERIOD_PLAN table . . . . . . 23

15. Example SCHEDULE table . . . . . . . 25

16. Example AVAILABILITY_PARM table . . . . 25

17. Example NW_PRODUCT_ID table . . . . . 27

18. Example basic alert code converter table 28

19. Example generic alert code converter table 29

20. Example NW_FAILURE_CODE table . . . . 29

21. Example NW_THRESHOLD table . . . . . 37

22. Example NW_THRESHOLD table . . . . . 41

23. Example NW_THRESHOLD table . . . . . 46

24. Selecting the component window . . . . . 49

25. Selecting the system parameters window 50

26. Components w indow . . . . . . . . . 50

27. Component Parts window . . . . . . . 51

28. Installation Options window . . . . . . . 51

29. Lookup Tables window. For non-QMF users,

F5 and F6 are not available. . . . . . . . 52

30. Role of environment information . . . . . 55

31. Methods of maintaining NW_RESOURCE data 56

32. ISPF work table and the Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS database . . . . . . . 62

33. ISPF work table and the Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS database . . . . . . . 63

34. ISPF work table and the Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS database . . . . . . . 64

35. Exporting data from the NW_RESOURCE table 64

36. STATMON loader . . . . . . . . . . 65

37. Window flow: Loading STATMON data 69

38. Network Administration Primary Option

window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

39. Set Defaults and Load Data window . . . . 70

40. Edit Resource Defaults window . . . . . . 71

41. Load Options window . . . . . . . . . 73

42. Window flow: Updating the database . . . . 74

43. Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Database

Update window . . . . . . . . . . . 74

44. Process Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

Statements window . . . . . . . . . . 75

45. Loading data from one domain at a time 76

46. Changing existing data . . . . . . . . . 78

47. Window flow: Changing existing data . . . 79

48. Loading data from the Tivoli Decision Support

for z/OS database . . . . . . . . . . 79

49. Loading data from the database into the work

table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

50. Windows for changing resource information 81

51. Change Resource Data window . . . . . . 82

52. Changing the selection list using Search1 82

53. Set Search1 Values window . . . . . . . 83

54. Changing the selection list using Search2 84

55. Set Search2 Values window . . . . . . . 84

56. Set Global Change Values window . . . . . 86

57. Multiple task with TSO . . . . . . . . 89

58. Confirm Changes pop-up . . . . . . . . 90

59. Change Application Resource Data window 91

60. Change NCP Resource Data window . . . . 92

61. Change Line Resource Data window . . . . 93

62. Change Cluster Resource Data window 94

63. Change Cross-connection Resource Data

window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

64. Change Group Resource Data window . . . 96

65. Change Local Resource Data window . . . . 97

66. Change Switched Resource Data window 98

67. Confirm Selection pop-up . . . . . . . . 99

68. Specify a New Resource window . . . . . 100

69. Merging new STATMON data into the

database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

70. Loading data from an external source 102

71. Window flow: Loading external data 103

72. Edit Resource Defaults window . . . . . 104

73. Define Data Set Name window . . . . . 105

74. Window flow: Exporting data . . . . . . 106

75. Define Data Set Name window . . . . . 106

76. Sample network configuration . . . . . . 110

77. Network Administration Primary Option

window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

78. List of defined systems . . . . . . . . 113

79. Resource default values for a new system 114

80. Load options window . . . . . . . . . 115

81. Confirmation of successful load of STATMON

data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

82. Initial Change Resource Data window 117

83. Search for all resources with NCP = UCX4 117

84. Selection list of resources attached to NCP

UCX4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

85. Change NCP Resource Data window 118

86. Hierarchical links between NCP, lines, and

clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

87. Changing NCP fields to NCPUCX . . . . 120

88. Adding a new NCP entry . . . . . . . 121

89. UCX2 resource entry . . . . . . . . . 121

90. Resource and synonym pointers . . . . . 122

91. Selection list of all resources in group

ATSOMAJ . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

92. Application resource entry . . . . . . . 124

93. Selection list of all resources where line =

V40LKNF8 . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

vii

94. Connecting resources to group LONDON1 126

95. Adding a new group entry . . . . . . . 127

96. Defining the geographic group entry 127

97. Search for all cross-connection resources 128

98. List of cross-connection resources . . . . . 129

99. Cross-connection resource entry for CDR2 130

100. Changed cross-connection resource entry for

CDR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

101. Confirming the verification of the work table 131

102. Selecting the system for database update 132

103. Processing database update statements 133

104. List of defined systems . . . . . . . . 134

105. Resource default values for a new system 134

106. Load Options window . . . . . . . . 135

107. Confirmation of successful load of STATMON

data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

108. Example of a complex network configuration 137

109. Definitions in work table for complex

network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

110. Example of a complex network using NPM 139

111. Deleting the sample data . . . . . . . . 140

112. Line utilization example A . . . . . . . 147

113. Line utilization example B . . . . . . . 147

114. Example of collect intervals . . . . . . . 149

115. SMF checking output—records processed by

record definition . . . . . . . . . . 161

116. SMF checking output—subtypes listed 161

117. Database tasks . . . . . . . . . . . 162

118. Specifying the system to edit . . . . . . 165

119. Load Options window . . . . . . . . 165

viii Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Preface

This book provides a brief introduction to the Network Performance feature of

IBM® Tivoli® Decision Support for z/OS® (hereafter referred to as Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS). It describes the planning necessary for the feature, and

procedures required to install the feature and administer the information in the

database tables. This book also contains an administration example that uses the

sample data supplied with the feature code.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS was previously known as Tivoli Decision Support

for OS/390®.

The following terms are used interchangeably throughout this book:

v Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS and Tivoli Decision Support for OS/390

v MVS™, OS/390, and z/OS

v OPC and Tivoli Workload Scheduler for z/OS

Who should read this book

Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration is for network analysts or

programmers who are responsible for setting up the network reporting

environment.

What this book contains

Use this book as a guide to installing and administering the Network Performance

feature. The book contains these chapters:

v Chapter 1, “Introducing the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Network

Performance feature” introduces the Network Performance feature, describes

how the feature works with network data, and summarizes the installation and

administration procedure described in the remainder of the book.

v Chapter 2, “Planning” describes the process required to plan for installing the

Network Performance feature and explains how to determine what parts of the

feature you need to install, and the planning and customization required for

each part.

v Chapter 3, “Installing the Network Performance feature” describes the procedure

for installing the Network Performance feature.

v Chapter 4, “Administering Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS and the Network

Performance feature” provides an overview of the administration process

required for the Network Performance feature. The chapter introduces the tasks

you must perform using the network administration dialog and the tasks you

must perform using the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS administration dialog.

v Chapter 5, “Working with the Network Performance feature Administration

dialog” explains how to use the network administration dialog to work with

network resource data.

v Chapter 6, “Administration Dialog Example” uses the sample data provided

with the feature to illustrate some of the tasks you must perform with the

network administration dialog.

ix

||

|

|

|

|

v Chapter 7, “Customizing NetView and NPM” lists the modifications you must

make to NetView® and NPM for the Network Performance feature to be able to

collect data accurately.

v Chapter 8, “Testing and maintaining the Network Performance feature” provides

information on moving the Network Performance feature into production.

This book contains the following appendixes:

v Appendix A, “Sample STATMON Inputs and Outputs”

v Appendix B, “External Data File Format”

v Appendix C, “Using the DRLENR2X User Exit”

This book also contains a list of abbreviations, a glossary, and an index.

Publications

This section lists publications in the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS library and

any other related documents. It also describes how to access Tivoli publications

online, how to order Tivoli publications, and how to submit comments on Tivoli

publications.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS library

This section lists publications in the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS library and

any other related documents. It also describes how to access Tivoli publications

online and how to order Tivoli publications.

v Accounting Feature for z/OS, SH19-4495

Provides information for users who want to use Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS to collect and report performance data generated by the Accounting

feature.

v Administration Guide, SH19-6816

Provides information about initializing the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

database and customizing and administering Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS.

v AS/400 System Performance Feature Guide and Reference, SH19-4019

Provides information for administrators and users about collecting and reporting

performance data generated by AS/400® systems.

v CICS Performance Feature Guide and Reference, SH19-6820

Provides information for administrators and users about collecting and reporting

performance data generated by Customer Information and Control System

(CICS®).

v Distributed Systems Performance Feature Guide and Reference, SH19-4018

Provides information for administrators and users about collecting and reporting

performance data generated by operating systems and applications running on a

workstation.

v Guide to the Reporting Dialog, SH19-6842

Provides information for users who display existing reports, for users who create

and modify reports, and for administrators who control reporting dialog default

functions and capabilities.

v IMS Performance Feature Guide and Reference, SH19-6825

Provides information for administrators and users about collecting and reporting

performance data generated by Information Management System (IMS™).

v Language Guide and Reference, SH19-6817

x Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Provides information for administrators, performance analysts, and

programmers who are responsible for maintaining system log data and reports.

v Messages and Problem Determination, SH19-6902

Provides information to help operators and system programmers understand,

interpret, and respond to Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS messages and codes.

v Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration, SH19-6901

Provides information for network analysts or programmers who are responsible

for setting up the network reporting environment.

v Network Performance Feature Reference, SH19-6822

Provides information for network analysts or programmers who are responsible

for setting up the network reporting environment.

v Network Performance Feature Reports, SH19-6821

Provides information for network analysts or programmers who use the

Network Performance feature reports.

v System Performance Feature Guide, SH19-6818

Provides information for performance analysts and system programmers who

are responsible for meeting the service-level objectives established in your

organization.

v System Performance Feature Reference Volume I, SH19-6819

Provides information for administrators and users with a variety of backgrounds

who want to use Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS to analyze Multiple Virtual

Storage (MVS) or Virtual Machine (VM) performance data.

v System Performance Feature Reference Volume II, SH19-4494

Provides information for administrators and users with a variety of backgrounds

who want to use Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS to analyze Multiple Virtual

Storage (MVS)or Virtual Machine (VM) performance data.

v IBM Online Library z/OS Software Products Collection Kit, SK3T-4270

CD containing all z/OS documentation.

The Tivoli Software Glossary includes definitions for many of the technical terms

related to Tivoli software. The Tivoli Software Glossary is available, in English only,

at the following Web site:

http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/tividd/glossary/termsmst04.htm

Using LookAt to look up message explanations

LookAt is an online facility that lets you look up explanations for most messages

you encounter, as well as for some system abends and codes. Using LookAt to find

information is faster than a conventional search because in most cases LookAt goes

directly to the message explanation.

You can access LookAt from the Internet at:

http://www.ibm.com/eserver/zseries/zos/bkserv/lookat/ or from anywhere in

z/OS or z/OS.e where you can access a TSO/E command line (for example,

TSO/E prompt, ISPF, z/OS UNIX® System Services running OMVS).

The LookAt Web site also features a mobile edition of LookAt for devices such as

Pocket PCs, Palm OS, or Linux™-based handhelds. So, if you have a handheld

device with wireless access and an Internet browser, you can now access LookAt

message information from almost anywhere.

Preface xi

To use LookAt as a TSO/E command, you must have LookAt installed on your

host system.

Accessing publications online

IBM posts publications for this and all other Tivoli products, as they become

available and whenever they are updated, to the Tivoli software information center

Web site. Access the Tivoli software information center by first going to the Tivoli

software library at the following Web address:

http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/tiviid/td/tdprodlist.html

Scroll down and click the Product manuals link. In the Tivoli Technical Product

Documents Alphabetical Listing window, click the Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS link to access the product library at the Tivoli software information center.

Note: If you print PDF documents on other than letter-sized paper, set the option

in the File ” Print window that allows Adobe Reader to print letter-sized

pages on your local paper.

Ordering publications

You can order many Tivoli publications online at the following Web

site:http://www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/public/applications/publications/

cgibin/pbi.cgi

You can also order by telephone by calling one of these numbers:

v In the United States: 800-879-2755

v In Canada: 800-426-4968

In other countries, see the following Web site for a list of telephone numbers:

http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/order-lit/

Accessibility

Accessibility features help users with a physical disability, such as restricted

mobility or limited vision, to use software products successfully. With this product,

you can use assistive technologies to hear and navigate the interface.You can also

use the keyboard instead of the mouse to operate all features of the graphical user

interface.

For additional information, see the Accessibility Appendix in the Administration

Guide.

Tivoli technical training

For Tivoli technical training information, refer to the following IBM Tivoli

Education Web site:

http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/education/

Contacting IBM Software Support

IBM Software Support provides assistance with product defects.

xii Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

|

||||

|

|||

|||

|

||

|

|

|

Before contacting IBM Software Support, your company must have an active IBM

software maintenance contract, and you must be authorized to submit problems to

IBM. The type of software maintenance contract that you need depends on the

type of product you have:

v For IBM distributed software products (including, but not limited to, Tivoli,

Lotus®, and Rational® products, as well as DB2® and WebSphere® products that

run on Windows® or UNIX operating systems), enroll in Passport Advantage® in

one of the following ways:

– Online: Go to the Passport Advantage Web page

(http://www.lotus.com/services/passport.nsf/WebDocs/

Passport_Advantage_Home) and click How to Enroll

– By phone: For the phone number to call in your country, go to the IBM

Software Support Web site

(http://techsupport.services.ibm.com/guides/contacts.html) and click the

name of your geographic region.v For IBM eServer™ software products (including, but not limited to, DB2 and

WebSphere products that run in zSeries®, pSeries®, and iSeries® environments),

you can purchase a software maintenance agreement by working directly with

an IBM sales representative or an IBM Business Partner. For more information

about support for eServer software products, go to the IBM Technical Support

Advantage Web page (http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/techsupport.html).

If you are not sure what type of software maintenance contract you need, call

1-800-IBMSERV (1-800-426-7378) in the United States or, from other countries, go to

the contacts page of the IBM Software Support Handbook on the Web

(http://techsupport.services.ibm.com/guides/contacts.html) and click the name of

your geographic region for phone numbers of people who provide support for

your location.

Follow the steps in this topic to contact IBM Software Support:

1. “Determine the business impact of your problem”

2. “Describe your problem and gather background information” on page xiv

3. “Submit your problem to IBM Software Support” on page xiv

Determine the business impact of your problem

When you report a problem to IBM, you are asked to supply a severity level.

Therefore, you need to understand and assess the business impact of the problem

you are reporting. Use the following criteria:

Severity 1 Critical business impact: You are unable to use the program,

resulting in a critical impact on operations. This condition

requires an immediate solution.

Severity 2 Significant business impact: The program is usable but is

severely limited.

Severity 3 Some business impact: The program is usable with less

significant features (not critical to operations) unavailable.

Severity 4 Minimal business impact: The problem causes little impact on

operations, or a reasonable circumvention to the problem has

been implemented.

Contacting IBM Software Support

Preface xiii

||||

||||

|||

||||

||||||

||||||

|

|

|

|

|

|||

|||||

|||

|||

|||||

Describe your problem and gather background information

When explaining a problem to IBM, be as specific as possible. Include all relevant

background information so that IBM Software Support specialists can help you

solve the problem efficiently. To save time, know the answers to these questions:

v What software versions were you running when the problem occurred?

v Do you have logs, traces, and messages that are related to the problem

symptoms? IBM Software Support is likely to ask for this information.

v Can the problem be recreated? If so, what steps led to the failure?

v Have any changes been made to the system? (For example, hardware, operating

system, networking software, and so on.)

v Are you currently using a workaround for this problem? If so, please be

prepared to explain it when you report the problem.

Submit your problem to IBM Software Support

You can submit your problem in one of two ways:

v Online: Go to the ″Submit and track problems″ page on the IBM Software

Support site (http://www.ibm.com/software/support/probsub.html). Enter

your information into the appropriate problem submission tool.

v By phone: For the phone number to call in your country, go to the contacts page

of the IBM Software Support Handbook on the Web

(http://techsupport.services.ibm.com/guides/contacts.html) and click the name

of your geographic region.

If the problem you submit is for a software defect or for missing or inaccurate

documentation, IBM Software Support creates an Authorized Program Analysis

Report (APAR). The APAR describes the problem in detail. Whenever possible,

IBM Software Support provides a workaround for you to implement until the

APAR is resolved and a fix is delivered. IBM publishes resolved APARs on the

IBM product support Web pages daily, so that other users who experience the

same problem can benefit from the same resolutions.

For more information about problem resolution, see “Searching knowledge bases”

and “Obtaining fixes” on page xv.

Searching knowledge bases

If you have a problem with your IBM software, you want it resolved quickly. Begin

by searching the available knowledge bases to determine whether the resolution to

your problem is already documented.

Search the information center on your local system or network

IBM provides extensive documentation that can be installed on your local machine

or on an intranet server. You can use the search function of this information center

to query conceptual information, instructions for completing tasks, reference

information, and support documents.

Search the Internet

If you cannot find an answer to your question in the information center, search the

Internet for the latest, most complete information that might help you resolve your

problem. To search multiple Internet resources for your product, expand the

product folder in the navigation frame to the left and select Support on the Web.

From this topic, you can search a variety of resources including:

v IBM technotes

Contacting IBM Software Support

xiv Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

|

|||

|

||

|

||

||

|

|

|||

||||

|||||||

||

|

|||

|||||

||||||

|

v IBM downloads

v IBM Redbooks™

v IBM DeveloperWorks

v Forums and newsgroups

v Google

Obtaining fixes

A product fix might be available to resolve your problem. You can determine what

fixes are available for your IBM software product by checking the product support

Web site:

1. Go to the IBM Software Support Web site

(http://www.ibm.com/software/support).

2. Under Products A - Z, select your product name. This opens a product-specific

support site.

3. Under Self help, follow the link to All Updates, where you will find a list of

fixes, fix packs, and other service updates for your product. For tips on refining

your search, click Search tips.

4. Click the name of a fix to read the description and optionally download the fix.

To receive weekly e-mail notifications about fixes and other news about IBM

products, follow these steps:

1. From the support page for any IBM product, click My support in the

upper-right corner of the page.

2. If you have already registered, skip to the next step. If you have not registered,

click register in the upper-right corner of the support page to establish your

user ID and password.

3. Sign in to My support.

4. On the My support page, click Edit profiles in the left navigation pane, and

scroll to Select Mail Preferences. Select a product family and check the

appropriate boxes for the type of information you want.

5. Click Submit.

6. For e-mail notification for other products, repeat Steps 4 and 5.

For more information about types of fixes, see the Software Support Handbook

(http://techsupport.services.ibm.com/guides/handbook.html).

Updating support information

Information centers typically include one or more support information plug-ins.

These plug-ins add IBM technotes and other support documents to the information

center. The following steps describe how to update your support information

plug-ins:

1. Go to the IBM Software Support Web site

(http://www.ibm.com/software/support).

2. Under Products A - Z, select your product name. This opens a product-specific

support site.

3. Under Search support for this product, type the keyword phrase:

com.ibm.support. Click the Download check box, and click Submit.

4. Check the search results for updates to support information plug-ins. All

support information plug-ins follow the naming convention,

″com.ibm.support.product.doc.″ If an update is available, select it from the list

and view the download instructions.

Contacting IBM Software Support

Preface xv

|

|

|

|

|

|

|||

||

||

|||

|

||

||

|||

|

|||

|

|

||

|

||||

||

||

||

||||

5. Save the attached zip file to a temporary location on your hard drive.

6. Unzip the downloaded file, making sure that you retain the subfolders.

7. From the location where you unzipped the file, copy the support information

plug-in folder to your Eclipse plug-ins folder. For example, if your IBM

software product is installed at c:\IBM\WebSphere\, copy the updated plug-in

folder (com.ibm.support.product.doc) to c:\IBM\WebSphere\eclipse\plugins.

8. To see the updated support information, start the information center (or shut it

down and restart it), and expand the Support information node in the

navigation tree.

Conventions used in this book

This guide uses several conventions for special terms and actions, operating

system-dependent commands and paths, and margin graphics.

The terms MVS, OS/390, and z/OS are used interchangeably throughout the book.

Typeface conventions

This guide uses the following typeface conventions:

Bold

v Lowercase commands and mixed case commands that are otherwise

difficult to distinguish from surrounding text

v Interface controls (check boxes, push buttons, radio buttons, spin

buttons, fields, folders, icons, list boxes, items inside list boxes,

multicolumn lists, containers, menu choices, menu names, tabs, property

sheets), labels (such as Tip:, and Operating system considerations:)

v Column headings in a table

v Keywords and parameters in text

Italic

v Citations (titles of books, diskettes, and CDs)

v Words defined in text

v Emphasis of words (words as words)

v Letters as letters

v New terms in text (except in a definition list)

v Variables and values you must provide

Monospace

v Examples and code examples

v File names, programming keywords, and other elements that are difficult

to distinguish from surrounding text

v Message text and prompts addressed to the user

v Text that the user must type

v Values for arguments or command options

Changes in this edition

This edition is an updated version that replaces the previous edition of the same

book. The changes are:

v The name of the product has been changed to Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

(except in figures).

Contacting IBM Software Support

xvi Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

|

|

||||

|||

||

Except for editorial changes, updates to this edition are marked with a vertical bar

to the left of the change.

Contacting IBM Software Support

Preface xvii

Contacting IBM Software Support

xviii Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Chapter 1. Introducing the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

Network Performance feature

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS is a reporting system that collects performance

data logged by computer systems, summarizes the data, and presents it in a

variety of forms for use in systems management. Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

consists of a base product and several optional features.

This chapter briefly introduces the Network Performance feature and the process

of installing and using the feature.

Meeting users’ needs

Many people are involved with network management, each one requiring different

data in different formats. The main requirement in network management is to filter

the large amount of data produced by a network and present the data so the users

receive the information they require, in the format they require to fulfill their tasks.

See Figure 1.

N E T W O R K

Data must be selected,organized, and presented

U S E R S

Figure 1. The need for a network management product

1

Implementing the solution

You must use several products to produce usable information from the network

data and ensure that users receive only necessary data. Figure 2 illustrates these

products and how they work together.

NetView and NPM gather performance and management data from the network

and write that information to system management facility (SMF) records. You can

customize these products to gather the data you need and write the data to SMF at

regular intervals. Customizing NetView and NPM to write only the data the

Network Performance feature needs to produce the desired reports helps organize

the data and reduce the performance impact.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS and the Network Performance feature collect

from the SMF records only the data required to meet users’ needs, combine that

data with additional data (called environment information), and present the resulting

data in the form of reports.

Figure 2. Organizing and presenting network data

2 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

The key to success when using the Network Performance feature is knowing:

v The information and resources on which you want to report and how to

customize NetView and NPM

v The way you want to organize, set objectives for, and process the data (this

information is used to define the environment data)

Chapter 1. Introduction 3

Selecting required data in Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

The information the Network Performance feature uses to produce reports for an

SNA network or for a TCP/IP network is organized into information categories.

The information categories are:

Availability Information on uptime (availability) and the

number of down events (stability) during service

hours

Configuration Information on hardware devices and software

products installed on the network

File transfer Information on file transfer transmissions and

requests

Problem Information on basic and generic alerts (hardware

problems) and session failures

Response time Information on response times and transit times

Service level A comparison of actual availability and response

time performance to defined objectives

Utilization Information on resource usage

Although Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS can analyze data and produce reports

for all these information categories, you may not need all this data. To make the

feature easy to customize, each information category is made up of one or more

components, each of which provides support for a particular portion of the

information category. During installation, you select the components you need,

ensuring that Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS will analyze the data and provide

the reports you need without collecting data that you do not need. The following

table lists the components that make up each information category.

Table 1. Network Performance feature components

Information category Components

Availability Network availability component

Configuration Network configuration component

File transfer Network NetView FTP component

Problem Network problem component

Network session failure component

Response time Network RTM response time component

Network NPM transit time component

Service level Network service component

4 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Table 1. Network Performance feature components (continued)

Information category Components

Utilization Network line utilization component

Network NCP utilization component

Network NPM internal utilization component

Network PU utilization component

Network NV/SM internal utilization component

Network NEO utilization component

Network NTRI utilization component

Network LAN utilization component

Network ODLC utilization component

Network X.25 utilization component

Network VTAM® utilization component

Network Frame Relay utilization component

Network SNMP routers component

If you want to report on availability, problems, and line utilization, you install only

those components. Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS produces the reports you

need and does not collect unneeded SMF records (for NetView FTP or NEO

utilization, for example).

Chapter 1. Introduction 5

Defining the network environment

To organize the network data collected from SMF, you must define the network

environment to Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS. This information is contained in

a series of tables that the Network Performance feature uses when processing data

and creating reports. See Figure 3.

This process occurs with each component. Because you can consider data

processing as a separate and unique process for each component, the information

in the Network Performance feature library is organized by component.

The process of entering and maintaining the environment information is known as

administration. Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS provides a Network

Administration dialog for maintaining the network resource information. Use the

base Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Administration dialog to maintain the rest

of the environment information.

Figure 3. Environment information

6 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Understanding Network Performance feature tasks

Figure 4 outlines the tasks involved in working with the Network Performance

feature and lists the chapters in this book that discuss these tasks.

The remainder of this book discusses the tasks illustrated in Figure 4.

Chapter 2, “Chapter 2, “Planning”” discusses the decisions you must make about

which components to install, how to modify the environment information, and

how to customize NetView and NPM.

Chapter 3, “Chapter 3, “Installing the Network Performance feature”” provides

information about installing the feature using SMP/E and installing specific

Network Performance feature components using information from the planning

process.

Chapter 4, “Chapter 4, “Administering Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS and the

Network Performance feature”” presents procedures for performing administration

tasks. Tasks performed outside the network administration dialog are discussed in

detail, and tasks performed through the network administration dialog are only

briefly discussed.

Chapter 5, “Chapter 5, “Working with the Network Performance feature

Administration dialog”” provides procedures for performing administration tasks

by using the network administration dialog.

Figure 4. Network Performance feature tasks

Chapter 1. Introduction 7

Chapter 6, ″Chapter 6, “Administration Dialog Example”″ contains an example of

the procedures involved in using the Network administration dialog.

Chapter 7, “Chapter 7, “Customizing NetView and NPM”” presents information

about customizing NetView and NPM to support the components you have

installed.

Chapter 8, “Chapter 8, “Testing and maintaining the Network Performance

feature”” provides information about performing a test run, evaluating the success

of that run, making any necessary modifications, and moving from the test system

to an in-production system.

8 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Chapter 2. Planning

This chapter provides information about the planning required to implement and

modify your Network Performance feature installation.

Understanding the planning process

The tasks involved in installing and administering the Network Performance

feature all depend upon decisions you make during the planning process. Figure 5

illustrates the role that planning plays in the installation and administration

process.

After you have installed the Network Performance feature using SMP/E, you must

plan each step of the implementation process. The basic planning steps are:

1. Determine users’ need for the Network Performance feature. What tasks must

they perform that the feature can accomplish or assist with?

2. Determine what components you must install to meet the users’ needs.

3. Determine the administration tasks you must perform for the selected

components and make any decisions required by these tasks. Some tasks use

the network administration dialog, while others use the Tivoli Decision Support

for z/OS administration dialog. The goal of these tasks is to customize Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS and the Network Performance feature to work with

your network.

4. Determine the NetView and NPM customization tasks required for each

selected component. The goal of these tasks is to customize NetView and NPM

to work with Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS and with the Network

Performance feature

If you are going through the planning process for the first time, you must perform

all these steps to ensure that your implementation of the feature is consistent. If

you are reading this chapter in preparation for modifying your system, you may

not need to perform all these steps.

Figure 5. Role of planning

9

Planning for installation

The first and most critical planning task is determining what kind of information

users need from the Network Performance feature. For example, users may be

interested only in the availability of network resources or response times of

network transactions. Installing only those parts of the feature needed to meet user

requirements ensures that the feature provides maximum benefit for users while

minimizing the performance impact caused by data collection and interpretation

activities.

Information processed by the Network Performance feature is divided into seven

information categories. Each information category consists of one or more

components that actually implement the data collection and reporting functions.

During installation, you select and install the components that meet users’ needs.

Carefully consider which components to install. If you find that you need reports

from a component that you have not installed, you must install the component and

then wait several days or weeks until enough data has been collected to create

reports. However, if you install more components than you need, Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS will collect unnecessary SMF data, which uses valuable disk

space.

The reports created by the service component are based on data collected by the

availability, RTM response time, and NPM transit time components. Although the

tables for these components are automatically installed when you install the service

component, the installation process does not fully install the components when

installing the service component. For example, you cannot collect availability data

and generate availability reports if you have only installed the service component.

To be able to collect availability data and generate availability reports, you must

install the availability component.

Selecting specific components to install lets you specify in detail what kind of

information Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS collects. For example, the utilization

information category consists of several components, each covering a specific type

of resource. However, if your network does not contain X.25 resources, you need

not install the X.25 utilization component.

The following table lists the information categories and their associated

components.

Table 2. Information categories

Category Function Components in category

Availability Provides information on uptime (availability) and

number of down events (stability) during service

hours

Availability

Configuration Provides information on hardware devices and

software products installed in the network

Configuration

File transfer Provides information on file transfer transmissions

and requests

NetView FTP

Problem Provides information on basic and generic alerts

(hardware problems) and session failures

Problem Session failure

Response time Provides information on response times and transit

times

RTM response time

NPM transit time

10 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Table 2. Information categories (continued)

Category Function Components in category

Service level Provides a comparison between actual availability,

RTM response time, NPM transit time, and

service-level objectives

Service

Utilization Provides information on resource usage Line utilization

NCP utilization

NPM internal utilization

PU utilization

NV/SM internal utilization

NEO utilization

NTRI utilization

LAN utilization

ODLC utilization

X.25 utilization

VTAM utilization

Frame Relay utilization

SNMP routers utilization

Refer to Network Performance Feature Reports for information about the type of

reports produced by each component.

The components you choose determine what planning tasks to perform, how you

customize NetView or NPM, and what SMF records you check.

For information on installing the selected components, see “Installing Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS components” on page 50.

Planning for components

The detailed planning tasks you must perform depend on the components you

have chosen to install. However, the basic planning process is the same for all

components (see Figure 6).

Chapter 2. Planning 11

The planning process prepares you to perform these main customization tasks:

1. Customizing NetView and NPM, which gather the network data and write the

data to SMF. You must customize these products so they generate the data

required by the components you install.

2. Defining environment information, which is all the information besides the SMF

data that the Network Performance feature needs to produce reports.

Environment information controls the collect process and provides additional

information in the reports. The information consists of these main types:

v Resource information

v Threshold information

v Period information

v Schedule information

v Product ID information

v Code converter information

See “Understanding environment information” on page 13 for a detailed

description of these types of information.

The tasks in the component planning process differ for the component you are

using. The following table lists the tasks required for each component (marked

with an X).

Table 3. Component planning tasks

Component

Environment information required Customization

Resource Threshold Period Schedule

Product

ID

Code con-

version NetView NPM

Availability X X X X

Configuration X

Figure 6. Basic component planning process

12 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Table 3. Component planning tasks (continued)

Component

Environment information required Customization

Resource Threshold Period Schedule

Product

ID

Code con-

version NetView NPM

NetView FTP X

Problem X X X X

Session failure X X X

RTM response

time

X X X

NPM transit time X X X

Service (see note) X X X X X

Line utilization X X X

NCP utilization X X X

NPM internal

utilization

X X

PU utilization X X

NV/SM internal

utilization

X X

NEO utilization X X X X

NTRI utilization X X X

LAN utilization X X

ODLC utilization X X X

X.25 utilization X X X X

VTAM utilization X X

Frame Relay

utilization

X X X

SNMP Routers

utilization

X

Note: Because the service component uses data from the availability component, the RTM response time

component, and the NPM transit time component, the planning tasks for these components are also required for the

service component.

As the table above shows, each component requires several planning tasks. For

example, planning for the availability component involves considering the contents

of the resource and schedule information and performing NetView customization.

You must follow a consistent goal during all three steps to ensure that the

availability component produces the reports users need.

After you have determined the planning tasks to perform, see the sections that

discuss these tasks in “Planning tasks for each component” on page 30.

Understanding environment information

All Network Performance feature components except the configuration component

require some form of environment information to process data or produce reports.

Environment information includes data about how Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS views your network and the network resources, what service levels are set

for the network, and how network schedules are defined.

Chapter 2. Planning 13

Maintaining the environment information

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS stores most of the environment information in

lookup tables, but some (such as response-time objectives and transit time

objectives) is stored in NetView and NPM. You can maintain the information

stored in Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS lookup tables by using either of these:

v Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS administration dialog

v Network administration dialog

The dialog you use depends on the information you are modifying. The network

administration dialog is designed specifically for working with network resource

information. You use the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS administration dialog to

modify the rest of the environment information.

During installation, Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS initializes some of the lookup

tables with default values. These lookup tables require very little maintenance.

However, you must update the tables that Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS does

not initialize for the Network Performance feature to work properly. You must also

maintain these tables as your network environment changes.

The following table lists the location of the environment information, the dialog

you use to change the information (marked with an X), and whether or not

defaults are provided.

Table 4. Environment administration

Environment type Lookup table

Network

administration

dialog

Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS

administration

dialog Default setting

Resource information NW_RESOURCE X No

Threshold information NW_THRESHOLD X Yes

Period information SPECIAL_DAY

DAY_OF_WEEK

PERIOD_PLAN

X Yes (see note)

Schedule information AVAILABILITY_PARM

SCHEDULE

X Yes (see note)

Product ID information NW_PRODUCT_ID X Yes

Code converter

information

NW_ALERT_DESC

NW_ALERT_TYPE

NW_FAILURE_CODE

NW_GENERAL_CAUSE

NW_PROBABLE_CAUSE

NW_SPECIFIC_CAUSE

X Yes

Note: These tables contain default values, but you should modify the defaults to reflect your site’s practices.

Understanding resource information

The largest and most complex part of planning for the Network feature is

describing and defining network resources (except terminal LUs). In general, the

Network Performance feature needs information about all resources in the

network. However, a specific component could collect data only for a specific

resource type (the NCP utilization component, for example). Installing components

with limited data-collection requirements means that you must define only the

resources those components require.

14 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Sources of resource data

The Network Performance feature lets you use one of these sources for resource

data:

v Data entered manually

v Data from STATMON

v Data from an external source

You can enter data manually using the network administration dialog to type

information about each network resource. However, the large amount of resource

data makes this task impractical. To avoid the need to enter resource information

manually, the dialog contains functions to let you load existing resource data from

the STATMON preprocessor or from an external source.

STATMON data includes information about the name, type, and description of a

resource. The dialog uses defaults and definition rules to provide the remaining

information. If the information provided by the defaults and rules does not meet

your requirements, you must use the network administration dialog to change the

information.

External data must follow a standard format (described in Appendix B, “External

Data File Format,” on page 171). It includes all resource information required by

the feature. If the information provided by the external source does not meet your

requirements, you must change the information at the external source, rather than

in the Network Performance feature.

You must consider these questions when planning resource information:

v How is the resource described? (See “Describing resources.”)

v How is the resource named? (See “Defining synonym names” on page 18.)

v What is the service-level objective? (See “Establishing service-level objectives” on

page 20.)

v Should this resource be included in the availability process? (See “Including

resources in availability processing” on page 19.)

v How are resources grouped? (See “Grouping resources” on page 16.)

v How are resources connected? (See “Understanding resource connections” on

page 20.)

You need not answer every question for all components. For example, if you are

installing the NCP utilization component, you need not consider whether to

include resources in the availability process.

Describing resources

You must describe each resource by using both a resource type identifier and a text

description. The description can include information such as equipment type or

location. The resource type is one of these standard types that the Network

Performance feature recognizes:

v Connection to either another domain or another network (Conn)

v Communication control unit (NCP)

v Line

v Cluster connected by a leased line (Cluster)

v Locally attached cluster (Local)

v Cluster connected as a switched resource (Switched)

v Application (Appl)

Chapter 2. Planning 15

The following table lists the resource types that you must define for each

component (marked with an X).

Table 5. Components and resource types

Component Conn NCP Line

Cluster Local

Switched Appl

Availability X X X X

Configuration (see note 1)

NetView FTP (see note 1)

Problem (see note 1)

Session failure (see note 1)

RTM response time X X

NPM transit time X X

Service X X

Line utilization

NCP utilization X

NPM internal utilization (see note 1)

PU utilization

NV/SM internal utilization (see note 1)

NEO utilization (see note 2) X (X) (X)

NTRI utilization (see note 2) X (X) (X)

LAN utilization (see note 1)

ODLC utilization (see note 2) X (X)

VTAM utilization (see note 1)

X.25 utilization (see note 2) X (X) (X)

Frame Relay utilization (see note 2) X (X) (X)

Note:

1. These components do not require any specific resource types to be defined.

2. Resource types listed in parentheses may not be needed if you do not create your own reports.

Grouping resources

You can group network resources so your network environment reflects the

network structure or administrative responsibilities. For example, you could group

your resources according to:

v Department

v Resource categories

v Geographic location

Without resource grouping, your reports provide information only about the entire

network or individual resources. Using resource grouping, you can divide your

network into smaller units so management-level reports can show problem

overviews and trends more clearly.

As an example, consider a situation where you are in charge of a company that has

four departments, each of which uses a portion of the company’s network. The

resources in that network are grouped by department, so you can track resource

usage and performance by department. The department managers receive reports

about the resources in their groups and the managers use these reports to track

16 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

and correct problems with individual resources that affect the performance of the

entire group. Because you are in charge of the managers, you receive a summary

report showing the performance of each group (department), which lets you

identify departments that are causing usage or performance problems for the entire

network. Figure 7 illustrates this example.

When you assign resources to groups, you must also define the group as a

resource. Each group resource uses its own resource data, which may be different

from the data for the resources in the group. For example, you can define a

different value for percentage availability for a group resource than for the

resources in the group.

You can create an alternate resource group by using the alternate group name. The

alternate name lets you group network resources using more than one method.

Figure 8 on page 17 illustrates how alternate resource grouping works.

In this example, if you produce a report that contains information about resource

groups, the report lists information about resource groups A, B, and C. If you

Summary report

Department A...Department B...Department C...Department D...

Department Aresources

Department Bresources

Department Cresources

Department Dresources

Figure 7. Resource grouping example

Figure 8. Resource grouping and alternate resource grouping

Chapter 2. Planning 17

design and create a report that lists information organized by the alternate group

name, that report contains information about resource groups 1, 2, 3, and 4.

None of the reports supplied with the Network Performance feature use the

alternate group name field, so you must create your own report if you want to use

another resource grouping.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS internally generates a group called ERRORGRP

to hold resources not defined in the NW_RESOURCE table.

Defining synonym names

For some resource types, the Network feature uses a synonym name instead of the

network name as the resource name. The network administration dialog

automatically generates a synonym name, but you must verify that the name is

correct.

You must define a unique synonym name for these resource types:

v Applications

v NCPs

v Cross-domain or cross-network connections

You use the network administration dialog to create or change resource synonyms.

See “Changing individual resource entries” on page 87 for more information.

Defining application synonyms: The Network Performance feature does not

require you to define synonym names for all applications. The cases where

synonym names are required are:

v Defining resources such as cross-network connections that appear in more than

one domain. For these resources, NetView uses the VTAM name, but NPM uses

the application control block (ACB) name. You must define a synonym to

combine the data from both resource names.

v Combining information from application subtasks under a single name. For

example, a TSO system consists of many subtasks, each of which corresponds to

an individual user session. When a user logs on to the TSO system, the user is

assigned to the next available subtask. Because each subtask is separate, Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS records response times for each subtask, rather than

for the system as a whole. To determine response time for the TSO system, you

must combine the response time of each subtask. By assigning a common

synonym name to all the subtasks, you can determine the response time for the

entire TSO system.

Synonym names are useful, although not required, in replacing a difficult and

uninformative VTAM name with an easily understood synonym. For example, you

can more easily understand a report when you replace a VTAM name such as

NO12A10 with a synonym name such as PRODCICS.

Because NPM also has the capability to convert synonyms, you must plan for

synonym names in both NPM and the Network Performance feature. When NPM

creates a synonym name for a resource defined in NetView, the network

administration dialog creates an entry for the resource name defined in NetView

and the resource synonym defined in NPM. To prevent the Network Performance

feature from viewing these two entries as different resources, you must assign an

identical synonym name to both entries.

18 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Defining NCP synonyms: If your site cycles through several names for the same

NCP (because of maintenance activities, for example), you must define a common

synonym name for all the possible NCP names to produce a complete picture of

NCP activity.

For example, if you cycle the name of an NCP between NCPA and NCPB as you

perform maintenance, the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS reports show no data

from NCPA at the point where you change the name of the NCP to NCPB. See

Figure 9.

To avoid this problem, define a synonym name for all possible names for the NCP.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS reports data from the NCP under the synonym

name, regardless of the actual NCP name.

For example, if you define a synonym name of NCPC to apply to both NCPA and

NCPB, the report shows continuous data when the NCP name changes from NCPA

to NCPB. See Figure 10.

Defining cross-domain or cross-network connection synonyms: SNA does not

provide a unique name to identify connections between domains of networks, so

you must define a synonym name to identify these types of connections. The

network administration dialog uses the cross-domain resource manager (CDRM)

names at each end to generate the default synonym name.

Including resources in availability processing

If you are performing availability measurements, you may choose to exclude

selected resources from the measurements. You can exclude resources from either:

Figure 9. Reports with changing NCP names

NCPC

1 2 3 4 5

Figure 10. Synonym name for changing NCP names

Chapter 2. Planning 19

v Availability processing

v Availability reporting

Switched resources is an example of a resource type you might exclude.

Availability is difficult to determine for these resources. When a switched resource

is identified as unavailable, you do not know if the resource is unavailable because

of a problem or because the resource has not tried to connect. However, you might

want to create your own report to determine when the resource connected and was

available. In this situation, you should include the resource in availability

processing but exclude it from the availability reporting provided by the Network

Performance feature reports. You can create your own reports that report only on

resources you have excluded from the reporting process.

Understanding resource connections

The connection information describes the connections between network resources.

For example, the connection information for a cluster identifies the line and the

communication controller attached to the cluster. This information is provided

automatically if you are using data from STATMON. If you are using resource data

from a source other than STATMON, you must provide this information.

Establishing service-level objectives

A service-level objective sets a goal of a specified level of service. This objective is

developed with input from network users to ensure that the service level reflects

the expected level of performance. The goal reflects a level of performance that

meets the needs of network users while also providing a concrete and realistic

assessment of network operations.

For example, you could set a service-level objective for resource availability stating:

v Network resources will be available 95% of the time.

v Resources will not be unstable.

If users ask about network availability problems, you can use Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS reports to check how often network resources met their

availability objective and how many times resources were down.

You can specify the criteria listed in the following table to establish service levels

in the Network Performance feature. The entries in the Reference column list

where you specify the service-level criteria.

Table 6. Service-level measurements in the Network Performance feature

Service-level measurement Reference

RTM response time:

v NetView RTM performance classes

“npm12—Collect transit time” on

page 151

NPM transit time:

v Acceptable transit time

v Percentage of transactions that should meet the transit-time objective

Figure 40 on page 71,

“npm15—Collect session data for

each resource” on page 152

Availability:

v Percentage of time a resource is available

v Resource stability (the number of times a resource is down during a

specified period)

Figure 40 on page 71

20 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Understanding threshold information

The Network Performance feature uses thresholds as criteria against which to

measure utilization exceptions and trends. The feature reports on the percentage of

time that utilization exceeds the threshold.

Utilization thresholds are defined in these ways in the Network Performance

feature:

v Hardcoded

v Calculated

v Defined in the NW_THRESHOLD lookup table

The following table shows the source of threshold values for different components

(marked with an X).

Table 7. Threshold implementation

Component Hardcoded Calculated

NW_THRESHOLD lookup

table See note

NCP utilization X X 1

Line utilization X

PU utilization 2

X.25 utilization X

NEO utilization X

NTRI utilization 2

NV/SM internal utilization 2

NPM internal utilization X 3

LAN utilization 4

ODLC utilization 2

VTAM utilization 2

Frame Relay utilization 2

Note:

1. The threshold value for the NCP CCU utilization is hardcoded to 70%. The threshold value for the NCP buffer

utilization is calculated.

2. This component does not use thresholds.

3. NPM buffer utilization is hardcoded to 80%.

4. The high-level threshold value is set by the LBRGCOLL (for LAN bridge utilization) or LSEGCOLL (for LAN

segment utilization) NPM command.

The NW_THRESHOLD lookup table contains threshold values for line, X.25, and

NEO resources. Figure 11 illustrates a sample table.

Chapter 2. Planning 21

You can use any of the first four columns in this table as keys for setting the load

threshold. You must supply resource names. The first entry in Figure 11 specifies a

threshold for all SDLC, half-duplex, 9600 bps lines, regardless of line name. The

second entry specifies a threshold for all SDLC, full-duplex, 9600 bps lines,

regardless of line name. The third entry specifies a threshold for all SDLC

half-duplex lines, regardless of the line name or speed. Use the global search

character (%) to create entries for groups of lines and eliminate the need to

explicitly define a load threshold for every line in your network.

The default values in the NW_THRESHOLD table should apply to most lines in

your network. You may have to create entries for specific lines (such as trunk lines)

that can operate at a higher utilization than the other lines in the table.

Understanding period information

Three tables, SPECIAL_DAY, DAY_OF_WEEK, and PERIOD_PLAN, convert the

date and time information included as part of the collected data into a specific

period, such as NIGHT, PRIME, or WEEKEND. These tables are not unique to the

Network Performance feature, but apply to all system resources. Refer to

Administration Guide for a description of these tables.

The SPECIAL_DAY and DAY_OF_WEEK tables provide information to identify the

day type, which is then used in other parts of period processing. The day type is

an identifier such as HOLIDAY, MON, TUE, WORKDAY, or WEEKEND. The

SPECIAL_DAY table identifies day types that are associated with a specific date.

For example, if you wanted to designate 13 June 1993 and 25 December 1993 as

holidays, your SPECIAL_DAY table would look like Figure 12.

When Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS determines the day type, it first looks in

the SPECIAL_DAY table to see if the current date matches one of the dates in the

table.

When Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS does not find a match in the

SPECIAL_DAY table, it uses the number associated with the current day of the

week to find a match in the DAY_OF_WEEK table. The DAY_OF_WEEK table

Resourcename Protocol Duplex

Linespeed

Loadthreshold pct

Datacolumn

Keycolumns

%%% %

SDLC HALF 96009600FULL

HALFSDLCSDLC

30.030.040.0

Figure 11. NW_THRESHOLD format

Figure 12. Example SPECIAL_DAY table

22 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

associates day types with weekday numbers 1 to 7. Figure 13 illustrates a typical

DAY_OF_WEEK table.

To simplify the period types, you can assign a single day type to more than one

day. For example, you can specify a day type of WEEKDAY for day of week

numbers 1 through 5 if all these days will use a common schedule.

The PERIOD_PLAN table matches the day types to period names. The table

specifies the periods of the day that have different operating characteristics. You

can also specify different period names for different system IDs.

As an example, consider these period requirements:

Weekdays PRIME period from 8:00 to 17:00, NIGHT period at all other times;

for system ID NET1, PRIME period at all times

Saturday PRIME period from 10:00 to 16:00, WEEKEND period at all other

times

Sunday WEEKEND period for all times

Holidays HOLIDAY period for all times

Figure 14 illustrates the entries in the PERIOD_PLAN table that define these

periods.

Note: The default timestamp uses periods, which can be changed to colons in

QMF™ if you have QMF installed. The timestamp format also depends on

the DB2® installation options.

DAY_OF_WEEK table

Day ofweek

Daytype

1234567

MONTUEWEDTHUFRISATSUN

Figure 13. Example DAY_OF_WEEK table

Figure 14. Example PERIOD_PLAN table

Chapter 2. Planning 23

The PERIOD PLAN ID column specifies the period plan, if any, to which the entry

should apply. The Network Performance feature uses the system ID as the period

plan ID. A plan ID of % indicates that the entry applies to all systems.

Change the schedule tables using the Tables option in the Tivoli Decision Support

for z/OS administration dialog. Refer to Administration Guide for information on

modifying the contents of these tables.

Understanding schedule information

The SCHEDULE table specifies periods during which network and system

resources are expected to be available. These periods normally correspond with

normal working hours for the work week and reduced hours for weekends and

holidays. These schedules are not unique to the Network Performance feature, but

apply to all system resources.

The main function of the SCHEDULE table in the Network Performance feature is

to help target the availability objectives. Each schedule you define is identified

with a schedule name.

When creating your schedule, you consider these main time periods:

v Weekdays

v Weekends

v Holidays

Each period will probably have a unique schedule, and each schedule can be

coded into the SCHEDULE table. Although you define several different schedules,

you can link them together by using a common name. Using a common name

simplifies the process of correlating schedule information to availability

information.

For example, consider these schedule requirements:

Monday Resources must be available from 8:00 to 17:00.

Other weekdays Resources must be available from 8:00 to 22:00.

Saturday Resources must be available from 08:00 to 14:00

and from 17:00 to 22:00.

Sunday Resources need not be available.

Holidays Resources need not be available.

Figure 15 illustrates the SCHEDULE table that meets these requirements.

24 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Note that all entries are named STANDARD. The common name indicates that,

taken together, these entries define the STANDARD schedule. When you define an

entry in the AVAILABILITY_PARM table for the STANDARD schedule, the entry

will apply to weekdays, Saturday, and Sunday, even though the scheduled hours

are different.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS retrieves the information in the DAY_TYPE

column from the SPECIAL_DAY or DAY_OF_WEEK table. See “Understanding

period information” on page 22 for information on these tables.

You need not define a schedule with a new name unless your network has some

resources that operate while other resources are down. Because these schedules are

based on resource operations, matching the schedule to the proper availability

objective is simplified.

Change the SCHEDULE table using the Tables option in the Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS administration dialog. Refer to Administration Guide for

information on modifying the contents of these tables.

The availability table, AVAILABILITY_PARM, specifies availability objectives and

schedule names that correspond to the names defined in the SCHEDULE table.

The feature uses the system ID, area, resource type, resource name, and resource

group information to determine the name of the applicable schedule. The values in

the column AVAIL_OBJ_PCT are not used by the Network Performance feature.

Change the availability table using the Tables option in the Tivoli Decision Support

for z/OS administration dialog. Refer to Administration Guide information on

modifying the contents of this table.

SCHEDULESCHEDULE table

Schedulename

Daytype

Starttime

Endtime

STANDARD MON 08.00.00 17.00.00STANDARD TUE 08.00.00 22.00.00STANDARD WED 08.00.00 22.00.00STANDARD THU 08.00.00 22.00.00STANDARD FRI 08.00.00 22.00.00STANDARD SAT 08.00.00 14.00.00STANDARD SAT 17.00.00 22.00.00STANDARD SUN 00.00.00 00.00.00STANDARD HOLIDAY 00.00.00 00.00.00

Figure 15. Example SCHEDULE table

Figure 16. Example AVAILABILITY_PARM table

Chapter 2. Planning 25

Understanding product ID information

When the Network Performance feature processes problem data, it performs these

tasks:

v Converts the hexadecimal product ID or block ID supplied in the SMF record to

a more easily understood product name.

v Categorizes products into groups reflecting responsibilities for network products.

You can then create problem reports based on resource categories so individuals

receive reports on only those products for which they are responsible.

v Determines the hierarchy level from which information about the owning

resource should be obtained.

To accomplish this task, the feature looks up the product ID or block ID in the

NW_PRODUCT_ID table, which lists product names, resource types, and hierarchy

information for each possible identifier. The feature then uses the information from

the table when updating the NW_ALERT_BASIC_H and NW_ALERT_GENERIC_H

tables.

Although this table contains a set of default values, you may want to change the

supplied values or add new values for new products not included in the table. The

problem report NWPROBLEM18 lists the product IDs for which Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS cannot find a corresponding name. If you modify the table, you

must include this information in each entry:

Product ID

The product ID (for generic alerts) or block ID (for basic alerts) from the

SMF record.

Product name

This field usually contains the model number (3270, 3614), model name

(SERIES/1, SYSTEM/38), or program name (NRF) represented by the

product ID or the block ID.

Resource type

The resource category (default values are APPL, CTRL, HOST, or COMM).

Hierarchy

The level of the owning resource in the network hierarchy. Each SMF

record contains configuration information for a failing network resource.

The configuration information consists of five levels of network hierarchy,

with each level represented by a resource level name and a resource level

type. The hierarchy field in the NW_PRODUCT_ID table specifies which of

these levels contains the name of the owning resource. For example, if the

hierarchy field is set to 3, the resource specified at level 3 in the hierarchy

is considered the owning resource.

A resource connected to the host (except communication controllers)

should specify the host as level 3 in the hierarchy. A resource connected to

a communication controller should specify the communication controller as

level 3. A resource that controls another network (such as AS/400) should

specify its own name as level 1.

Figure 17 illustrates a sample NW_PRODUCT_ID table.

26 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Understanding code converter information

When the Network Performance feature processes session failure and problem

data, it must handle a mix of hexadecimal and text information describing the

problem. To make processing easier, the feature uses code converter tables to

convert some of this information into formats that better match the data’s use in

the feature.

Although these tables all contain default settings, you must change the information

in the tables if you change code points or alert types in NetView. For

NW_ALERT_TYPE, NW_FAILURE_CODE, NW_GENERAL_CAUSE, and

NW_SPECIFIC_CAUSE, you need not add entries, because all possible code points

are included.

Basic alert code converter tables

Basic alert processing uses these code converters:

NW_ALERT_TYPE

Converts NetView hardware monitor alert or event types to long and short

text descriptions

NW_GENERAL_CAUSE

Converts NetView hardware monitor general cause codes to long and short

text descriptions

NW_SPECIFIC_CAUSE

Converts NetView hardware monitor specific component codes to short

and long text descriptions

Figure 18 illustrates a sample basic alert code converter table, in this case

NW_ALERT_TYPE.

Figure 17. Example NW_PRODUCT_ID table

Chapter 2. Planning 27

The basic planning process is the same for all of these tables. You must identify the

code that corresponds to the information you want to add or modify, then create or

change the descriptive text associated with that code. Long descriptions contain a

maximum of 30 characters and short descriptions contain a maximum of 5

characters.

If your network generates alert codes that are unique to your network, you must

create entries in the code converter tables to support this data. During processing,

if the Network Performance feature does not find a match in the proper code

converter table, the feature returns a default value.

The sample table in Figure 18 contains a number of entries identified as

UNDEFINED. If these codes appear in the SMF data, you can change the

description to match the code’s meaning. To prevent problems with your reports,

do not delete these codes.

Generic alert code converter tables

The feature uses the probable cause of a generic alert as a key in the main database

table. However, NetView supplies the probable cause information in the form of a

text description. To save space in the database, the feature uses a code converter

table to convert the text description to a code point value.

Generic alert processing uses these code converters:

NW_ALERT_DESC

Converts generic alert descriptions to code points

NW_PROBABLE_CAUSE

Converts probable cause descriptions to probable cause code points

Figure 19 illustrates a sample generic alert code converter table.

Figure 18. Example basic alert code converter table

28 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

If your network generates cause descriptions that are unique to your network, you

must create entries in the code converter tables to support this data. During

processing, if the Network Performance feature does not find a match in the

proper code converter table, the feature returns a default value. For example, if the

feature cannot find a match for an alert description in the table in Figure 19, the

feature uses the default value, FFFF, as the alert description code.

Session failure code converter

Session failure processing uses this code converter:

NW_FAILURE_CODE

Converts session failure codes to text descriptions

Figure 20 illustrates the default values provided in NW_FAILURE_CODE.

You must identify the code that corresponds to the information you want to add or

modify, then create or change the descriptive text associated with that code. The

descriptions contain a maximum of 30 characters.

If your network generates failure reason codes that are unique to your network,

you must create entries in the code converter tables to support this data. During

processing, if the Network Performance feature does not find a match in the

NW_FAILURE_CODE table, the feature returns a default value. For example, if the

feature cannot find a match for a reason code in the table illustrated in Figure 20, it

uses an alert type code of 40 and returns DEFAULT VALUE as the alert

description.

Figure 19. Example generic alert code converter table

Figure 20. Example NW_FAILURE_CODE table

Chapter 2. Planning 29

The sample table in Figure 20 contains several entries identified as UNDEFINED.

The alert type codes associated with these entries are not currently used, so you

can create your own entries that use these codes. To prevent problems with your

reports, do not delete these codes.

Planning tasks for each component

This section discusses the planning tasks required for each component. The

description of a component’s planning tasks includes a table listing the required

tasks. Because some of the tasks, such as establishing resource groups, are required

for more than one component, those tasks are marked in the table with a G. Tasks

specific to a component are marked with an X.

Availability

The first task in planning for availability is deciding which resources should be

included in availability measurements. This decision will influence how you

customize NetView and how you define the resource information. The following

table lists the planning tasks for the availability component.

Note: Lines are not supported in the availability implementation.

Table 8. Availability planning tasks

Resource

type

Describe

resources

Group

resources

Include

resources

Create

synonym

names

Establish

service

objectives

Create

schedules

Customize

NetView

Conn G G X X X X X

NCP G G X G X X X

Line

Cluster G G X X X X

Local G G X X X X

Switched

Appl G G X G X X X

Describing resources

Create a short description for each resource. The description appears in the reports

to give meaningful information about each resource. See “Describing resources” on

page 15 for more information.

Grouping resources

You must define resource groups and assign each resource to one of the groups.

See “Grouping resources” on page 16 for more information.

Including resources

After you have determined which resources to include in availability

measurements, you must decide whether the remainder of the network resources

should be excluded from the availability process or excluded from the availability

reports. See “Including resources in availability processing” on page 19 for more

information on excluding resources from processing. To exclude resources from

availability reporting, use the network administration dialog to specify that the

resource should be excluded from the reporting process.

The Network Performance feature does not support availability of switched

resources, so the network administration dialog automatically excludes these

resources. Refer to Network Performance Feature Reference for a detailed description

30 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

of the problems involved in including switched resources in the availability

process. If you decide to include switched resources, perform the same tasks that

you perform for cluster and local resources.

Creating synonym names

You must create a synonym name for application, NCP, and cross-domain or

cross-network connection resources. See “Defining synonym names” on page 18 for

special considerations involved in creating synonym names for these resource

types.

Establishing service objectives

Taken together, availability and response time make up the service-level objective.

The availability objective is expressed as the percentage availability and the

number of down events per scheduled day. For the availability component, only

the percentage availability and number of down events for each resource are part

of this task. See “Establishing service-level objectives” on page 20 for information

about the schedule information.

Initially establish the service objective by setting identical service objectives for

each resource type. You can then use the default setting function of the network

administration dialog to change the default value for specified resources. If you

have already established a service-level agreement (SLA), use the agreement values

as the objective.

Creating schedules

To measure availability, you must define the period when the resource should be

available (the schedule period). Establish the schedule period and determine

whether you can use the same schedule for all resources. See “Understanding

period information” on page 22 for more information.

Customizing NetView

The Network Performance feature uses data from NetView to determine

availability. If you do not customize NetView properly, the wrong information

could be collected. NetView customization is described in Chapter 7, “Customizing

NetView and NPM,” on page 141. When performing NetView customization, you

must pay special attention to these considerations:

v Ensure that NetView is customized to write these subtypes of the SMF record:

session start (03), session end (02), accounting and availability (04), and

combined (05). For information on performing this customization, see

“nv2—Collect NetView session awareness data” on page 142 and “nv3—Log

NetView session awareness data to SMF” on page 142.

v Carefully select the interval at which the accounting and availability record is

written to the SMF log. This information represents the active state of resources

(one SMF record for each resource event). See “nv5—Collect session statistics for

active sessions” on page 143 for information on performing this task. This

interval affects the accuracy of the availability when NetView or VTAM fails and

the time when the availability process stops calculating availability.

Defining a short interval results in the most accurate availability measurements

when NetView or VTAM fails. In general, accuracy is half the interval time. The

disadvantage in using a short interval is that the process produces many SMF

records and increases session monitor utilization.

The availability calculation, which is performed during the Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS collection, requires information about at least one active or

stop event for an available resource to calculate availability. To process

availability information for all selected resources, NetView must write active

Chapter 2. Planning 31

session information to the SMF log, preferably immediately before the log is

dumped. Refer to Network Performance Feature Reference for more information.

You must determine a compromise for your system that ensures accurate

measurements while minimizing the performance impact on the system.

Special considerations for cross-connection resources

You must take special steps in a situation when two hosts log data for the same

cross connection, because there may be errors in the reported availability. For

example, when a cross connection fails, both hosts detect and log a down event.

When Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS processes the information, it records two

down events instead of one. To avoid this type of error, you must decide which

host will measure cross-connection availability and delete the resource representing

the other host from the NW_RESOURCE table.

This solution requires that the system identifier defined in the network

administration dialog is the same as the system identifier in the SMF record.

Resources logged by the host not responsible for measuring are named

ERRORDUP during the collect process.

Configuration

The configuration component does not use environment information so you must

consider only these two items:

v Because the configuration data only reflects the current information, you need

not collect data every day. You should collect the VPD data at specified intervals.

v Specifying NetView to gather the VPD information for the entire network could

affect network performance. To reduce the performance impact, divide the

collect process so that data for only part of the network is collected at a time.

NetView FTP

Because the NetView FTP component does not use environment information, you

need only consider the SMF record type used for data collection when planning.

SMF record type

The Network Performance feature assumes that SMF collects NetView FTP data in

type 252 records. However, your installation may use another record type. If so,

you must customize the SMF_FTP record definition to use the correct record type.

Problem

Because the problem component uses only the product ID and code conversion

information, this component requires very little planning. However, you should

verify that the default values supplied in the NW_PRODUCT_ID table cover all of

the problem groups. See “Understanding product ID information” on page 26 for

more information about the NW_PRODUCT_ID table.

After you have started using the problem component, you can perform ongoing

planning tasks to ensure the accuracy of the problem reports.

The NWPROBLEM18 report lists product IDs or block IDs received that do not

contain a corresponding entry in the NW_PRODUCT_ID table. Use this report to

verify that the NW_PRODUCT_ID table includes all the products in your network.

If the report indicates that some products are not included in the table, you must

modify the NW_PRODUCT_ID table. See “Understanding product ID information”

on page 26 for more information.

32 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

In the reports, check for alert descriptions listed as UNDEFINED. This description

indicates that the listed code point is not defined in the code converter table. If the

reports indicate that undefined code points are present, you must update the

appropriate code converter table. See “Understanding code converter information”

on page 27 for more information.

Session failure

Because the session failure component uses only the code conversion environment

information, very little planning is required for this component.

After you have collected session failure data, check for unsupported session failure

codes. If you find codes that are not supported, you must update the

NW_FAILURE_CODE lookup table to include the codes. See “Understanding code

converter information” on page 27 for more information.

RTM response time

The RTM function is included in the IBM 3174 and the IBM 3708 and is a feature

in the IBM 3274. NetView obtains the RTM response time data from the PUs either

at the end of a session or at a defined interval. You define the response-time

service objective to NetView, but the Network Performance feature also uses the

objective.

The following table lists the planning tasks for this component.

Table 9. RTM response-time planning tasks

Resource type

Describe

resources Group resources

Create

synonym

names

Establish service

objectives

Customize

NetView

Cluster G G X X

Local G G X X

Switched G G X X

Appl G G G X X

Describing resources

Create a short description for each resource. The description appears in the reports

to give meaningful information about each resource. See “Describing resources” on

page 15 for more information.

Grouping resources

You must define resource groups and assign each resource to one of the groups.

See “Grouping resources” on page 16 for more information.

Creating synonym names

You must create a synonym name for application resources. See “Defining

synonym names” on page 18 for special considerations involved in creating

synonym names.

Establishing service objectives

RTM response time, NPM transit time, and availability make up the service-level

objective. The RTM response-time objective is expressed as:

v The percentage of transactions that are completed within a specified time

v The time within which the transaction should be completed

Chapter 2. Planning 33

The NetView PCLASS definition establishes the service objective for the RTM

response time. The PCLASS parameter OBJTIME defines the time within which the

transaction should be completed. The OBJPCT parameter defines the percentage of

transactions that should be completed within the specified time (OBJTIME). You

can define different objectives for different parts of your network and use the

NetView MAPSESS definition to specify the response-time objective (PCLASS) that

each LU uses.

To plan the response-time objective, follow these guidelines:

v Determine the response time objectives necessary for the network. Each objective

requires a separate set of PCLASS definitions. If your installation has a

service-level agreement, use the agreement values as the objective.

v Study the naming convention of your installation to determine ways to simplify

the MAPSESS definitions. You must create MAPSESS definitions so each LU

(terminal) uses the correct objective (PCLASS).

Refer to Network Performance Feature Reference for detailed information on using the

PCLASS and MAPSESS definitions.

Customizing NetView

The Network Performance feature uses data from NetView to report on RTM

response time. NetView customization is described in Chapter 7, “Customizing

NetView and NPM,” on page 141. When performing NetView customization, pay

special attention to these considerations:

v NetView always writes RTM data to SMF when a session ends. However, to

help you better analyze network performance, you should customize NetView to

also write RTM data to SMF at a specified time interval. For example, consider a

session that is active from 9:00 to 14:00 but that has a performance problem at

11:00 that causes response times to become very long. If you do not customize

NetView to write RTM data at intervals, the only RTM data is from the end of

the session, and the performance problem appears to have occurred at 14:00. If

you customize NetView to write RTM data to SMF at 20-minute intervals, you

can determine that the increased response time occurs at 11:00. Accurately

determining the time when response-time problems occur lets you search for

other components that have performance problems at the same time.

However, do not define an interval that is too short, because a short reporting

interval can degrade NetView performance and increase the number of SMF

records written.

For more information on specifying reporting intervals, see “nv8—Collect RTM

data and log to SMF” on page 143.

v Customize the NetView PCLASS and MAPSESS definitions based on the

planning done during “Establishing service objectives” on page 33.

For information on customizing these definitions, see “npm14—Define

transit-time objective” on page 152.

NPM transit time

By using data from NPM, the Network Performance feature can report on host,

network, and operator transit times as seen from VTAM. So NPM can measure the

network and operator transit times, an application must either use definite

response (DR) or have NPM set definite response dynamically. You must determine

if you want reports to include information about only host transit time or about

host, network, and operator transit times. If you decide to report on network and

operator transit times, determine which applications are set to use definite

response.

34 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

In addition, in the case of Telnet sessions to mainframe applications, for the IP

network request to be measured, the Telnet server and the client must have

negotiated the TN3270E response option. Otherwise the network transit time refers

only to the SNA segment of the network.

Refer to the NPM Concepts and Planning for more information on calculating Telnet

session transit times.

You must customize NPM to use dynamic definite response for all other

applications.

The following table lists the planning tasks for this component.

Table 10. NPM transit-time planning tasks

Resource type

Describe

resources Group resources

Create

synonym

names

Establish service

objectives Customize NPM

Cluster G G X X

Local G G X X

Switched G G X X

Appl G G X X X

Describing resources

Create a short description for each resource. The description appears in the reports

to provide information about each resource. See “Describing resources” on page 15

for more information.

Grouping resources

Define resource groups and assign each resource to one of the groups. See

“Grouping resources” on page 16 for more information.

Creating synonym names

Create a synonym name for application resources. Since NPM can log either the

application ACB name or its own defined synonym, you should work with the

NPM system programmer to plan the synonym definition. See “Defining synonym

names” on page 18 for special considerations involved in creating synonym names.

Establishing service objectives

RTM response time, NPM transit time, and availability make up the service-level

objective. The NPM transit-time objective is expressed as the percentage of

transactions that are completed within a specified time and the times, measured in

seconds, that the host, network, and operator transit times should not exceed. This

service objective is defined both in the Network Performance feature environment

data and in NPM. Before starting this planning, discuss the differences for the host

time (HOST), the network time (NETWORK), and the operator time (OPERATOR)

with the NPM system programmer.

Define the first part of the objective (the percentage of transactions that should

meet the transit time objective) in the network administration dialog by using the

Transit time in % field (see Figure 40 on page 71). When you use the dialog to load

data from STATMON, set the most common value as the default (see “Loading

STATMON data into the work table” on page 69) to minimize the need for

changes.

Chapter 2. Planning 35

When planning the NPM transit time objective, follow these guidelines:

v Make a list of applications for which you want transit time to be measured. Use

the list to note applications for which you must customize NPM to use dynamic

definite response.

v Determine the host transit time objective for each application.

v Determine the network transit time objective. The network transit time objective

might be the same for all applications, because the network transit time

represents the delay in the network and is not dependent on host processing.

v Set the operator transit time objective to the total of the host and network transit

time objectives.

For detailed information on these guidelines, refer to the Network Performance

Feature Reference.

If your installation has a service-level agreement, use the agreement values as the

objective.

Customizing NPM

The Network Performance feature uses data from NPM to report on transit time.

See Chapter 7, “Customizing NetView and NPM,” on page 141 for information on

NPM customization. When performing NPM customization, pay special attention

to these items:

v You must define an APPL statement for each application for which NPM should

collect transit time data. You can also use the APPL statement to define the NPM

synonym name and the characteristic for data collection. See “npm13—Define

NPM APPL statements” on page 152 for information on defining the APPL

statement.

v You should customize NPM to collect transit time data by application, which

means you must define one SESSCOLL command for each application whose

transit time you want to measure. NPM starts measurement for any LU that is in

session with the named application.

Specify the second part of the transit time objective (the time that network

transactions should meet) as the high threshold value for the operands HOST,

NETWORK, and OPERATOR. See “npm15—Collect session data for each

resource” on page 152 for more information.

v Define the interval for collecting session data. See “npm3—NPM collect interval”

on page 146 for information.

v Define the dynamic definite response.

v Negotiate the TN3270E response option (for Telnet sessions).

Service

Because the service component uses information from the availability component,

RTM response time component, and NPM transit time component, you must install

and customize these components to use the service component. However, the

service component does not require separate planning tasks.

Line utilization

The Network Performance feature line utilization reports compare leased line

utilization data (measured by NPM) with threshold information.

36 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

The following table lists the planning tasks for this component.

Table 11. Line utilization planning tasks

Resource type Verify threshold setting Customize NPM

Line X X

Verifying threshold setting

The most important part of planning for the line utilization component is verifying

the line threshold setting, which is contained in the NW_THRESHOLD table. The

threshold value is the maximum acceptable load value before performance begins

to degrade.

When you install the Network Performance feature, the NW_THRESHOLD table is

initialized with default values. However, these defaults may not reflect the line

speed, duplex modes, or threshold settings at your installation, so you should

update the NW_THRESHOLD table to better suit your installation.

Planning for the NW_THRESHOLD table consists of these steps:

1. Establish the default values in the table.

The default values in the NW_THRESHOLD table contain a global search

character (%) in the Resource name fields. Verify that the default entries include

the line speeds and duplex modes in your network and that the Load threshold

fields contain values appropriate for your network. If necessary, add new

default entries for other line speeds and duplex modes and change the load

threshold values.

2. Set specific values for lines that should not use the default values.

You must create an entry for each line that uses a load threshold not included

in the default entries. For example, if the default threshold for network lines is

60% and you want to specify a threshold of 100% for trunk lines between

NCPs, you must create an entry for each trunk line that specifies the new

threshold.

Figure 21 illustrates an NW_THRESHOLD table containing �1� four default rows

and �2� one row with a specific threshold value of 100%.

Because the X.25 utilization and NEO utilization components also use the

NW_THRESHOLD table, the default values in the table may be a compromise

between the requirements of each component.

See “Understanding threshold information” on page 21 for more information on

thresholds.

Resourcename

%%%%LINE_1

SDLCSDLCSDLCSDLCSDLC

HALFFULLHALFFULLFULL

96009600192001920019200

50.050.060.060.0100.0

Lineprotocol

Linespeed

LoadthresholdDuplex

1

2

Figure 21. Example NW_THRESHOLD table

Chapter 2. Planning 37

Customizing NPM

The Network Performance feature uses data from NPM to report on line

utilization. NPM customization is described in Chapter 7, “Customizing NetView

and NPM,” on page 141.

When customizing NPM for line utilization, pay special attention to these items:

v To better analyze line utilization, customize NPM to write the line utilization

data to SMF at a defined time interval. Shortening the interval improves the

accuracy of the utilization data, but it also increases the number of SMF records

written. You must balance the need for accuracy with the need to keep the

number of SMF records to a minimum.

See “npm3—NPM collect interval” on page 146 for information on setting the

measurement interval.

v The Network Performance feature calculates line utilization and capacity and

sets the duplex mode based on the line speed definitions in the NPM SMF

records. So, the line speed information written to SMF must be correct to ensure

that the information in the line utilization reports is correct.

NPM obtains the line speed information either from the speed parameter in the

NCP line macro (which is contained in the RRT module) or from the NPM LINE

command. Because the NCP does not use the information in the speed

parameter, the parameter could be incorrectly defined.

To verify the line speed, check the NPM LINE command and the speed

parameter in the NCP line macro. See “npm11—Verify line speed” on page 151

for more information.

NCP utilization

The NCP utilization reports compare NCP utilization data (measured by NPM)

with threshold information set by the Network Performance feature.

The following table lists the planning tasks for this component.

Table 12. NCP utilization planning tasks

Resource type

Describe

resources

Group

resources

Create

synonym

names Customize NPM

NCP X X G X

You need not plan the threshold information, because the feature calculates the

buffer usage threshold and the CCU utilization is hardcoded.

Describing resources

Create a short description for each resource. The description appears in the reports

to provide information about each resource. See “Describing resources” on page 15

for more information.

Grouping resources

Define resource groups and assign each resource to one of the groups. See

“Grouping resources” on page 16 for more information.

Creating synonym names

You must create a synonym name for NCPs. See “Defining synonym names” on

page 18 for special considerations associated with creating synonym names.

38 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Customizing NPM

The Network Performance feature uses data from NPM to report on NCP

utilization. When performing NPM customization, pay special attention to the

measurement interval.

To better analyze NCP utilization, customize NPM to write the NCP utilization

data to SMF at a defined time interval. Shortening the interval improves the

accuracy of the utilization data, but it also increases the number of SMF records

written. You must balance the need for accuracy with the need to keep the number

of SMF records to a minimum.

See “npm3—NPM collect interval” on page 146 for information on setting the

measurement interval.

NPM internal utilization

Because the NPM internal utilization component does not use environment

information, planning for this component involves only these considerations:

v Verifying the NPM name

v Determining the collect interval

v Customizing NPM

NPM name

The Network Performance feature builds the name under which NPM data is

logged by concatenating the system ID and subsystem ID (=NPM) found in the

SMF record header. If your reports include data from more than one NPM, verify

that the system ID for the host (where the NPMs reside) is different.

Collect interval

NPM writes information about its own utilization to SMF with an interval equal to

the defined NPM base interval. Verify that the base interval is set to an acceptable

value not only for this component, but also for the collect intervals for the other

components.

Note: The NPM base interval value determines how you must define the collect

interval for other utilization components.

See “npm3—NPM collect interval” on page 146 for information on setting the

measurement interval.

Customizing NPM

Customize NPM to write the internal utilization data to SMF (see Chapter 7,

“Customizing NetView and NPM,” on page 141).

PU utilization

Because the PU utilization component does not use environment information,

planning for this component involves considering only NPM customization.

Customize NPM to collect the PU utilization data (see Chapter 7, “Customizing

NetView and NPM,” on page 141).

NV/SM utilization

Because the NV/SM utilization component does not use environment information,

planning for this component involves considering only the NetView name and

NetView customization.

Chapter 2. Planning 39

NetView name

The Network Performance feature builds the name under which NetView data is

logged by concatenating the system ID and subsystem ID found in the SMF record

header. If your reports include data from more than one NetView, verify that the

combination of system ID and subsystem ID is unique for each NetView.

Customizing NetView

Customize NetView to write the internal utilization data to SMF. See

“nv11—Collect session monitor utilization data” on page 144 for information on

performing this task.

NEO utilization

The NEO utilization component reports on NEO utilization data measured by

NPM. The component compares NEO link data with threshold information.

The following table lists the planning tasks for this component.

Table 13. NEO utilization planning tasks

Resource type

Describe

resources

Create

synonym

names

Verify

threshold

setting Customize NPM

NEO X G X X

NEO resources are not assigned to any groups.

Describing resources

Create a short description for each resource. This description appears in the reports

to provide information about each resource. See “Describing resources” on page 15

for more information.

Creating synonym names

Because the name of the NCP to which the NEO resources are attached is stored as

part of the NEO utilization information, you must create a synonym name for

NCPs. See “Defining synonym names” on page 18 for information on special

considerations associated with creating synonym names.

Verifying threshold setting

The most important part of planning for the NEO utilization component is

verifying the threshold setting, which is contained in the NW_THRESHOLD table.

The threshold value is the maximum acceptable load value before performance

begins to degrade. NEO links are assumed to be in full duplex mode and to use

SDLC protocol.

When you install the Network Performance feature, the NW_THRESHOLD table is

initialized with default values. However, these defaults may not reflect the line

speed, duplex modes, or threshold settings at your installation, so update the

NW_THRESHOLD table to better suit your installation.

Planning for the NW_THRESHOLD table consists of these steps:

1. Establish the default values in the table.

The default values in the NW_THRESHOLD table contain a global search

character (%) in the Resource name fields. Verify that the default entries include

the line speeds and duplex modes (set to full duplex by the Network

Performance feature) in your network and that the Load threshold fields

40 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

contain values appropriate for your network. If necessary, add new default

entries for other line speeds and duplex modes and change the load threshold

values.

2. Set specific values for lines that should not use the default values.

You must create an entry for each line that uses a load threshold not included

in the default entries. For example, if the default threshold for network lines is

60% and you want to specify a threshold of 100% for trunk lines between

NCPs, you must create an entry for each trunk line that specifies the new

threshold.

Figure 22 illustrates NW_THRESHOLD table containing �1� four default rows and

�2� one row with a specific threshold value of 100%.

Because the line utilization and X.25 utilization components also use the

NW_THRESHOLD table, the default values in the table may be a compromise

between the requirements of each component.

See “Understanding threshold information” on page 21 for more information on

thresholds.

Customizing NPM

The Network Performance feature uses data from NPM to report on NEO

utilization. NPM customization is described in Chapter 7, “Customizing NetView

and NPM,” on page 141.

When customizing NPM for line utilization, pay special attention to these

considerations:

v To better analyze NEO utilization, customize NPM to write the NEO utilization

data to SMF at a defined time interval. Shortening the interval improves the

accuracy of the utilization data, but it also increases the number of SMF records

written. You must balance the need for accuracy with the need to keep the

number of SMF records to a minimum.

See “npm3—NPM collect interval” on page 146 for information on setting the

measurement interval.

v The Network Performance feature calculates NEO link utilization based on the

line speed definitions in the NPM SMF records. So, the line speed information

written to SMF must be correct to ensure that the information in the line

utilization reports is correct.

NPM obtains the line speed information either from the speed parameter in the

NCP line macro (which is contained in the RRT module) or from the NPM LINE

command. Because the NCP does not use the information in the speed

parameter, the parameter could be incorrectly defined.

Resourcename

%%%%LINE_1

SDLCSDLCSDLCSDLCSDLC

HALFFULLHALFFULLFULL

96009600192001920019200

50.050.060.060.0100.0

Lineprotocol

Linespeed

LoadthresholdDuplex

1

2

Figure 22. Example NW_THRESHOLD table

Chapter 2. Planning 41

To verify the line speed, check the NPM LINE command and the speed

parameter in the NCP line macro. See “npm11—Verify line speed” on page 151

for more information.

NTRI utilization

The NTRI utilization component reports on the utilization data measured by NPM

for token-ring sessions that pass through the token-ring interface coupler (TIC).

The feature does not compare the utilization data with threshold information.

The following table lists the planning tasks for this component.

Table 14. NTRI utilization planning tasks

Resource type Describe resources

Create synonym

names Customize NPM

NTRI X X X

Describing resources

Create a short description for each resource. The description appears in the reports

to provide information about each resource. See “Describing resources” on page 15

for more information.

Creating synonym names

Because the name of the NCP that NTRI is part of is stored as part of the NTRI

utilization information, you must create a synonym name for NCPs. See “Defining

synonym names” on page 18 for information on special considerations associated

with creating synonym names.

Customizing NPM

The Network Performance feature uses data from NPM to report on NTRI

utilization. NPM customization is described in Chapter 7, “Customizing NetView

and NPM,” on page 141.

To better analyze NTRI utilization, customize NPM to write the NTRI utilization

data to SMF at a defined time interval. Shortening the interval improves the

accuracy of the utilization data, but it also increases the number of SMF records

written. You must balance the need for accuracy with the need to keep the number

of SMF records to a minimum.

See “npm3—NPM collect interval” on page 146 for information on setting the

measurement interval.

Frame Relay utilization

The Frame Relay utilization component reports on the utilization data measured by

NPM for token-ring sessions that pass through the token-ring interface coupler

(TIC). The feature does not compare the utilization data with threshold

information.

The following table lists the planning tasks for this component.

Table 15. Frame Relay utilization planning tasks

Resource type Describe resources

Create synonym

names Customize NPM

Frame Relay X X X

42 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Describing resources

Create a short description for each resource. The description appears in the reports

to provide information about each resource. See “Describing resources” on page 15

for more information.

Creating synonym names

Because the name of the NCP that Frame Relay is part of is stored as part of the

Frame Relay utilization information, you must create a synonym name for NCPs.

See “Defining synonym names” on page 18 for information on special

considerations associated with creating synonym names.

Customizing NPM

The Network Performance feature uses data from NPM to report on Frame Relay

utilization. NPM customization is described in Chapter 7, “Customizing NetView

and NPM,” on page 141.

To better analyze Frame Relay utilization, customize NPM to write the Frame

Relay utilization data to SMF at a defined time interval. Shortening the interval

improves the accuracy of the utilization data, but it also increases the number of

SMF records written. You must balance the need for accuracy with the need to

keep the number of SMF records to a minimum.

See “npm3—NPM collect interval” on page 146 for information on setting the

measurement interval.

LAN utilization

Because the LAN utilization component does not use environment information,

you only need to consider the NPM customization.

The following table lists the planning tasks for this component.

Table 16. LAN utilization planning tasks

Resource type Customize NPM

LAN X

Customizing NPM

The Network Performance feature uses data from NPM to report on LAN

utilization. When performing NPM customization, pay special attention to the

measurement interval.

To better analyze LAN utilization, customize NPM to write the LAN utilization

data to SMF at a defined time interval. Shortening the interval improves the

accuracy of the utilization data, but it also increases the number of SMF records

written. You must balance the need for accuracy with the need to keep the number

of SMF records to a minimum.

See “npm18—Define the LAN collection interval” on page 153 for information on

setting the measurement interval.

If you want to include threshold comparison of the LAN bridge and LAN

segment, set the high threshold parameter in the LBRGCOLL or LSEGCOLL NPM

command. See “npm19—Collect LAN bridge data” on page 155 and

“npm20—Collect LAN segment data” on page 155 for details.

Chapter 2. Planning 43

ODLC utilization

The ODLC utilization component reports on the utilization data measured by NPM

for 3746 model 900 (expansion frame of the 3745 CCU) LAN physical links and

LAN station PUs. The feature does not compare the utilization data with threshold

information.

The following table lists the planning tasks for this component.

Table 17. ODLC utilization planning tasks

Resource type

Describe

resources Create synonym names Customize NPM

ODLC X X X

Describing resources

Create a short description for each resource. The description appears in the reports

to provide information about each resource. See “Describing resources” on page 15

for more information.

Creating synonym names

Because the name of the NCP that ODLC is part of is stored as part of the ODLC

utilization information, you must create a synonym name for NCPs. See “Defining

synonym names” on page 18 for information on special considerations associated

with creating synonym names.

Customizing NPM

The Network Performance feature uses data from NPM to report on ODLC

utilization. NPM customization is described in Chapter 7, “Customizing NetView

and NPM,” on page 141.

To better analyze ODLC utilization, consider that NPM writes the ODLC

utilization data to SMF at a defined time interval. This information is sent to NPM

by the NCP unsolicited.

VTAM utilization

The VTAM utilization component does not use environment information, so you

only need to consider the NPM customization, described in “Customizing NPM”

on page 145.

The Network Performance feature uses data from NPM to report on VTAM

utilization. To analyze VTAM utilization, customize NPM to write the utilization

data to SMF at intervals of 5 to 10 minutes.

See “npm22—Changing the VTAM interval” on page 156 for information on setting

the measurement interval.

X.25 utilization

The Network Performance feature X.25 utilization component reports on X.25

utilization data measured by NPM. The feature compares X.25 link data with

threshold information.

44 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

The following table lists the planning tasks for this component.

Table 18. X.25 utilization planning tasks

Resource type

Describe

resources

Create synonym

names

Verify threshold

setting Customize NPM

X.25 X G X X

X.25 resources are not assigned to any resource groups.

Describing resources

Create a short description for each resource. The description appears in the reports

to provide information about each resource. See “Describing resources” on page 15

for more information.

Creating synonym names

Because the name of the NCP to which the X.25 resources is attached is stored as

part of the X.25 utilization information, you must create a synonym name for

NCPs. See “Defining synonym names” on page 18 for information on special

considerations associated with creating synonym names.

Verifying threshold setting

The most important part of planning for the X.25 utilization component is

verifying the threshold setting, which is contained in the NW_THRESHOLD table.

The threshold value is the maximum acceptable load value before performance

begins to degrade. X.25 links are assumed to use full duplex mode and SDLC

protocol.

When you install the Network Performance feature, the NW_THRESHOLD table is

initialized with default values. However, these defaults may not reflect the line

speed, duplex modes, or threshold settings at your installation, so you should

update the NW_THRESHOLD table to better suit your installation.

Planning for the NW_THRESHOLD table consists of these steps:

1. Establish the default values in the table.

The default values in the NW_THRESHOLD table contain a global search

character (%) in the Resource name fields. Verify that the default entries include

the line speeds and duplex modes (set to full duplex by the Network

Performance feature) in your network and that the Load threshold fields

contain values appropriate for your network. If necessary, add new default

entries for other line speeds and duplex modes and change the load threshold

values.

2. Set specific values for lines that should not use the default values.

You must create an entry for each line that uses a load threshold not included

in the default entries.

Figure 23 on page 46 illustrates an NW_THRESHOLD table containing �1� four

default rows and �2� one row with a specific threshold value of 100%.

Chapter 2. Planning 45

Because the line utilization and NEO utilization components also use the

NW_THRESHOLD table, the default values in the table may be a compromise

between the requirements of each component.

See “Understanding threshold information” on page 21 for more information on

thresholds.

Customizing NPM

The Network Performance feature uses data from NPM to report on X.25

utilization. NPM customization is described in Chapter 7, “Customizing NetView

and NPM,” on page 141.

When customizing NPM for line utilization, pay special attention to these

considerations:

v To better analyze X.25 utilization, customize NPM to write the X.25 utilization

data to SMF at a defined time interval. Shortening the interval improves the

accuracy of the utilization data, but it also increases the number of SMF records

written. You must balance the need for accuracy with the need to keep the

number of SMF records to a minimum.

See “npm3—NPM collect interval” on page 146 for information on setting the

measurement interval.

v The Network Performance feature calculates X.25 link utilization based on the

line speed definitions in the NPM SMF records. So, the line speed information

written to SMF must be correct to ensure that the information in the line

utilization reports is correct.

NPM obtains the line speed information either from the speed parameter in the

NCP line macro (which is contained in the RRT module) or from the NPM LINE

command. Because the NCP does not use the information in the speed

parameter, the parameter could be incorrectly defined.

To verify the line speed, check the NPM LINE command and the speed

parameter in the NCP line macro. See “npm11—Verify line speed” on page 151

for more information.

SNMP routers utilization

Because the SNMP routers utilization component does not use environment

information, you only need to consider the NPM customization, described in

“Customizing NPM” on page 145.

Resourcename

%%%%LINE_1

SDLCSDLCSDLCSDLCSDLC

HALFFULLHALFFULLFULL

96009600192001920019200

50.050.060.060.0100.0

Lineprotocol

Linespeed

LoadthresholdDuplex

1

2

Figure 23. Example NW_THRESHOLD table

46 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

The following table lists the planning tasks for this component.

Table 19. SNMP routers utilization planning tasks

Resource type Customize NPM

SNMP routers X

Customizing NPM

The Network Performance feature uses data from NPM to report on SNMP routers

utilization. When performing NPM customization, pay special attention to the

measurement interval.

To better analyze SNMP routers utilization, customize NPM to write the SNMP

routers utilization data to SMF at a defined time interval. Shortening the interval

improves the accuracy of the utilization data, but it also increases the number of

SMF records written. You must balance the need for accuracy with the need to

keep the number of SMF records to a minimum.

See “npm3—NPM collect interval” on page 146 for information on setting the

measurement interval.

Chapter 2. Planning 47

48 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Chapter 3. Installing the Network Performance feature

This chapter provides procedures for installing the Network Performance feature

and selecting the components you want to use.

Installing the Network Performance feature involves loading the feature and

installing the required Network Performance feature components. The procedure

you follow when installing the components depends on decisions you made

during the planning process (see Chapter 2, “Planning,” on page 9).

Installing the feature

After you have installed and customized the base Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

product, use SMP/E to install the Network Performance feature. The Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS Program Directory provided in hard-copy format with the

installation media, describes the SMP/E procedures for installing the feature.

Changing the dialog parameters

Before you start to install the components, decide how Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS should be organized and operated. The issues to consider in this process

could be whether or not the Network Performance feature should use its own

database, the prefix of the tables, the name of the local definitions data set, or the

saved reports data sets prefix. The Administration Guide provides a detailed

discussion of overall Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS operation. If the default

definitions set during the base Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS implementation

are to be changed for the Network Performance feature, you must change and

update the dialog parameters before you start the installation of the different

components. Figure 25 on page 50 shows how the Dialog Parameters window is

selected.

To select the dialog parameters window, follow these steps.

1. From the Primary Menu window, type 2 and press Enter to select the

Administration window.

2. From the Administration window, type 1 and press Enter to select the System

window.

Figure 24. Selecting the component window

49

3. From the System window, type 1 and press Enter to select the Dialog

parameters window. Refer to the Administration Guide for more information.

Installing Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS components

After you install the Network Performance feature and verify the dialog

parameters, you must install the feature components required to meet your needs.

(Chapter 2, “Planning,” on page 9, contains information about selecting the

components. Use the decisions you make in that chapter as input to the installation

process presented in this section.) Figure 25 illustrates the window flow for the

installation process.

To install components, follow these steps:

1. From the Administration window, type 2 and press Enter to select the

Components option.

The Components window (Figure 26) appears.

2. To select the components you want to install, type a slash (/) next to those

component names.

3. To install the selected components, either press F6 (Install) or select the Install

option from the Component pull-down.

Primary Menu

Reports

Administration

Administration

Network ......Network ......Network ......Network ......

Components

Components

Logs

Tables

Reports

System

Online

Batch

Installationoption

Figure 25. Selecting the system parameters window

Component Space Other Help

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Components ROW 1 TO 13 OF 48

Select one or more components. Then press Enter to Open component.

/ Components Status Date

_ Network LAN Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network Line Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network NCP Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network NEO Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network NPM Internal Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network NPM Transit Time Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network NTRI Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network NV/SM Internal Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network Problem Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network PU Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network RTM Response Time Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network Service Component Installed 00-04-06

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=New F6=Install F7=Bkwd

F8=Fwd F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 26. Components w indow

50 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

If the component you selected contains subcomponents, the Component Parts

window (Figure 27) appears.

4. To select one of the displayed subcomponents to install, type a slash (/) next to

the subcomponent name and press Enter.

5. To install only the main component, press F12.

When you select the component or subcomponent you want to install, the

Installation Options window (Figure 28) appears.

Component Space Other Help

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| NWAVAIL Component Parts ROW 1 TO 1 OF 1 |

| |

| Select the parts of the component you want to install. Then press Enter. |

| |

| / Component Part Status Date |

| _ Network External Availability Part Installed 00-03-19 |

| ***************************** BOTTOM OF DATA ****************************** |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| Command ===> _____________________________________________________________ |

| F1=Help F2=Split F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

F8=Fwd F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 27. Component Parts window

- --------------------------------------------------------------- ----------

| Installation Options | TO 13 OF 48

| |

S | Select one of the following. Then press Enter. |

| |

/ | __ 1. Online | Date

_ | 2. Batch | 00-04-08

_ | | 00-04-06

_ | F1=Help F2=Split F6=Objects F9=Swap F12=Cancel | 00-04-06

/ ’-------------------------------------------------------------’ 00-04-06

_ Network NEO Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network NPM Internal Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network NPM Transit Time Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network NTRI Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network NV/SM Internal Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network Problem Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network PU Utilization Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network RTM Response Time Component Installed 00-04-06

_ Network Service Component Installed 00-04-06

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=New F6=Install F7=Bkwd

F8=Fwd F9=Swap F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 28. Installation Options window

Chapter 3. Installing the Network Performance feature 51

6. To select online processing, type 1 and press Enter. Go to step 7.

To select batch processing, type 2 and press Enter. The dialog begins an ISPF

edit session, where you can edit and submit the installation JCL. You should

save the installation batch job in a data set. When you end the ISPF edit

session, the Components window reappears. The components you selected for

installation have a status of Batch.

7. When you select online processing, the Lookup Tables window (Figure 29)

appears, listing the lookup tables required by the components you selected.

8. Although you may want to edit some of these lookup tables at some time, you

need not edit them now. If you do want to edit a table now, type a slash (/)

beside the name of table you want to edit. Press Enter to begin an ISPF Edit

session and edit the table. If you do not want to edit the tables now, press F12.

Note: Do not edit the NW_RESOURCE table using ISPF Edit. Use the network

administration dialog to edit the NW_RESOURCE table.

The SQL messages for the installation process appear.

9. Press F12 to continue the installation process.

The Components window reappears and displays a message indicating that the

component was installed. The component you selected now has a status of

Installed.

When you complete this step, you have finished installing the selected Network

Performance feature component.

To install more than one component, you can either select one component at a time

from the Components panel (see Figure 26 on page 50) or select all the components

you want to install at once.

DRLDACLU Lookup Tables

Select a lookup table. Then press Enter to Edit the table in ISPF Edit mode.

More: +

/ Lookup table

_ AVAILABILITY_PARM

_ NW_RESOURCE

F1=Help F5=QMF Add F6=QMF Chg F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel

Figure 29. Lookup Tables window. For non-QMF users, F5 and F6 are not available.

52 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Before you can use the Network Performance feature, you must define the

environment information required by the installed components and customize

NetView and NPM to support the components. See “Chapter 4, “Administering

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS and the Network Performance feature”” for

information on defining the environment information and “Chapter 7,

“Customizing NetView and NPM”” for information on customizing NetView and

NPM.

Chapter 3. Installing the Network Performance feature 53

54 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Chapter 4. Administering Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS and

the Network Performance feature

This chapter contains information about the tasks required to administer the

Network Performance feature and the parts of Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

that work with the feature.

To administer the Network Performance feature, you define and modify

environment information. Environment information consists of all information that

the Network Performance feature combines with SMF data to create reports.

Figure 30 illustrates how the Network Performance feature uses environment

information.

Because the feature contains several components, each of which produces a unique

set of reports, each component requires its own set of environment information.

See “Planning for components” on page 11 to determine what environment

information is required for the components you installed.

Administering resource information

The largest category of environment information is resource information, which

consists of information describing the network resources and their relationship to

one another. The NW_RESOURCE table contains this information.

You can maintain the data in the NW_RESOURCE table by using either the

Administration dialog or the Network administration dialog. See Figure 31 on page

56.

Figure 30. Role of environment information

55

Administration dialog direct-edit method

The Administration dialog lets you edit the NW_RESOURCE table directly. You

need not load data into the work table or use the network administration dialog’s

editing function. You can add or change individual rows or use the ISPF editor to

change the data in the table.

Advantages

You need not use the work table, which eliminates performance problems that can

be associated with that table. You will notice this advantage when you make minor

changes.

Disadvantages

The work table data no longer matches the NW_RESOURCE table data. An update

of the NW_RESOURCE table, with data in the work table, discards direct-edit

changes. With a direct edit, you cannot use search, global change, and

error-checking capabilities. This means that errors may go undetected. Because the

Network administration dialog maintains data internally, you could accidentally

overwrite Network administration dialog changes when you use the

Administration dialog.

Network administration dialog

Because a typical network contains many resources, entering the resource

information for the network could be time-consuming and expensive. The Network

Performance feature solves this problem by letting you import resource

information from the STATMON preprocessor or an external source into the

feature. You can then use the resource information as it is or modify the

information (by grouping resources or adding synonyms, for example) to better

meet your needs.

You work with the information in the NW_RESOURCE table through the network

administration dialog. For information about using the dialog, see Chapter 5,

“Working with the Network Performance feature Administration dialog,” on page

61. Chapter 6, “Administration Dialog Example,” on page 109 describes how to

change the environment information in a sample system.

Resource information is required for these components:

v Availability

v RTM response time

v NPM transit time

v Service

v NCP utilization

v NEO utilization

v NTRI utilization

Figure 31. Methods of maintaining NW_RESOURCE data

56 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

v ODLC utilization

v X.25 utilization

v Frame Relay utilization

Administering threshold information

The threshold information, contained in the NW_THRESHOLD table, consists of

utilization levels for line resources. The feature reports on the percentage of time or

the number of measurement intervals during which the utilization exceeded the

level defined in NW_THRESHOLD. See “Understanding threshold information” on

page 21 for information on determining the contents of this table.

To modify the information in the NW_THRESHOLD table, use the procedure for

modifying tables in the Administration dialog. Refer to Administration Guide for

information on modifying this table.

These components require the information in NW_THRESHOLD:

v Line utilization

v NEO utilization

v X.25 utilization

Administering period tables

The period tables, SPECIAL_DAY, DAY_OF_WEEK, and PERIOD_PLAN, identify

the specific day or the day of the week and period of the day during which data

was collected. The DAY_OF_WEEK table specifies day type information for each

day in the week (for example, MON, TUE). The SPECIAL_DAY table specifies day

type information for specific dates such as holidays (for example, 1993-12-25 could

be identified as HOLIDAY). The PERIOD_PLAN table specifies the period type

during which the SMF data was collected (for example, data collected at 10:00 is

identified as having been collected during the PRIME period; data collected at

19:00 is identified as having been collected during the NIGHT period). These

schedule tables are not unique to the Network Performance feature, but apply to

all system resources. See “Understanding period information” on page 22 for

information on determining the contents of these tables.

Note: The date notation (for example, 1993-12-25) is a default that can be changed

in QMF if you have QMF installed.

To modify the information in the SPECIAL_DATE, DAY_OF_WEEK, and

PERIOD_PLAN tables, use the procedure for modifying tables in the

Administration dialog. Refer to Administration Guide for information on modifying

these tables.

All components except availability and configuration require the information in the

period tables.

Administering the schedule table

The SCHEDULE table identifies the times during each day when resources are

expected to be available. These times usually correspond with normal working

hours for the work week and reduced hours for weekends and holidays. When the

feature records availability data, it checks the day type and time against the

information in the SCHEDULE table to determine if the measurements are

expected to meet the availability and stability service-level objectives. See

“Understanding schedule information” on page 24 for information on determining

the contents of this table.

Chapter 4. Administrating 57

To modify the information in the SCHEDULE table, use the procedure for

modifying tables in the Administration dialog. Refer to Administration Guide for

information on modifying this table.

The availability component requires the information in the SCHEDULE table.

Administering the product ID table

When the Network Performance feature processes problem data, it converts the

hexadecimal product ID or block ID supplied in the SMF record to a more easily

understood product name. To accomplish this task, the feature looks up the

product ID or block ID in the NW_PRODUCT_ID table, which lists product names,

resource types, and hierarchy information for each possible identifier. The feature

then uses the information from the table when updating the

NW_ALERT_BASIC_H and NW_ALERT_GENERIC_H tables. See “Understanding

code converter information” on page 27 for information on determining the

contents of this table.

To modify the information in the NW_PRODUCT_ID table, use the procedure for

modifying tables in the Administration dialog. Refer to Administration Guide for

information on modifying these tables.

The problem component requires the information in the product ID tables.

Administering code converter tables

When NetView writes session failure and problem data to the SMF log, it identifies

the problem by means of a hexadecimal code. To make the reports more

understandable, the Network Performance feature converts these codes to text

descriptions. Although these tables all contain default settings, you may want to

add or change the information in the tables.

The code converter tables and their functions are:

NW_ALERT_TYPE

Converts NetView hardware monitor alert or event types in long and short

text descriptions

NW_FAILURE_CODE

Converts session failure codes to text descriptions

NW_GENERAL_CAUSE

Converts general cause codes to long and short text descriptions

NW_SPECIFIC_CAUSE

Converts NetView hardware-monitor-specific component codes to short

and long text descriptions

NW_ALERT_DESC

Converts generic alert descriptions to code points

NW_PROBABLE_CAUSE

Converts probable cause descriptions to probable cause code points

See “Understanding code converter information” on page 27 for information on

determining the contents of these tables.

58 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

To modify the information in the code converter tables, use the procedure for

modifying tables in the Administration dialog. Refer to Administration Guide for

information on modifying these tables.

The problem and session failure components require the information in the code

converter tables.

Chapter 4. Administrating 59

60 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Chapter 5. Working with the Network Performance feature

Administration dialog

This chapter contains procedures for using the network administration dialog to

load and modify resource data and to update the NW_RESOURCE table in the

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database.

After you complete the installation process (described in “Chapter 3, “Installing the

Network Performance feature””), you must define your network and service-level

information to the feature. The Network Performance feature administration dialog

lets you define and modify the network resource information, which describes

your network to the feature. The network resource information describes items

such as the network configuration, network resources, and the connections

between resources.

Understanding the need for the network administration dialog

The network administration dialog is a tool that helps you work with the network

resource data stored in the NW_RESOURCE table. This table is part of the Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS database and describes the network to the Network

Performance feature. Defining the contents of the NW_RESOURCE table can be a

complex task in some situations (for example, defining synonym translations). The

dialog helps make these complex tasks more simple to perform and it also

provides functions to verify your definitions.

The dialog minimizes the amount of typing you do when defining resources by

using information from STATMON to define resources. When you load the

STATMON data, the dialog uses default information (which you specify) and

definition rules to complete the definition of the resources.

If your installation has a file of network resource information, you can use the

dialog to import that data into the NW_RESOURCE table. Before you import the

data, you must create a program to put the resource data into the format required

by the Network Performance feature. If you import data from an external source,

you can use the administration dialog to update only the NW_RESOURCE table,

and maintain the resource information in the external source.

The network administration dialog does not work directly with the

NW_RESOURCE table in the database, but stores the data in an ISPF work table.

From the work table, you can use the dialog to edit, export, or verify the resource

data. After you have finished working with the data in the work table, you must

update the NW_RESOURCE table with the data from the work table.

Attention: Do not use a split screen to start multiple sessions of the network

administration dialog, or let more than one user start the dialog at a time. Either of

these situations may cause the contents of the NW_RESOURCE table and the ISPF

work table to differ and result in a corrupted NW_RESOURCE table.

Network administration dialog functions

Figure 32 provides an overview of the administration dialog’s main functions.

61

The work table is used to store the data while the other network administration

dialog functions use it (see “Work table”).

Figure 32 illustrates these functions:

STATMON loader

This function loads STATMON information into the work table (see

“STATMON loader” on page 65).

Database loader

This function loads NW_RESOURCE data into the work table (see

“Database loader” on page 67).

Editor This function lets you add, update, and delete information in the work

table (see “Editor” on page 66).

Verify This function verifies the information stored in the work table (see “Verify”

on page 66).

Database update

This function updates the data in the database table by loading the data in

the work table into the NW_RESOURCE table (see “Database update” on

page 67).

Import

This function reads a sequential file, in a defined format, and loads that file

into the work table (see “Import” on page 65).

Export This function unloads the data in the work table and writes the data to a

sequential file (see “Export” on page 66). The format used is the same as

that used by the import function.

The following sections explain how each function works.

Work table

The work table is at the core of the network administration dialog. The goal of the

administration process is to work with the data in the NW_RESOURCE table, but

it is difficult to work directly with the table. The network administration dialog

Externalfile

Import

STATMONloader Work

table

Editor

Verify

DB update

DB loader

Database

NW_RESOURCEtable

Externalfile

Export

Figure 32. ISPF work table and the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database

62 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

uses the work table as a temporary storage area while you are working with the

network resource information. Using the work table involves these main processes:

v Loading data into the work table

v Updating the NW_RESOURCE table

Loading data into the work table

You can load data into the work table in these situations:

v Loading only STATMON data

v Loading only NW_RESOURCE table data

v Merging STATMON data with NW_RESOURCE table data

v Adding STATMON data to the work table data

v Importing data from an external file

The last situation should never occur with the other cases.

Figure 33 shows the functions that the dialog uses to load data into the work table.

This list describes which functions the dialog uses when loading data in each

situation:

Loading only STATMON data

The dialog uses only the STATMON loader �1�. The dialog clears the work

table before loading the STATMON data.

Loading only NW_RESOURCE table data

The dialog uses only the DB loader �2�. The dialog clears the work table

before loading the NW_RESOURCE data.

Merging STATMON data with NW_RESOURCE table data

The dialog uses both the STATMON loader �1� and the database loader

�2�. The dialog clears the work table before loading the data.

Adding STATMON data to the work table data

The dialog uses only the STATMON loader �1�. The work table contains

data that the dialog needs, so the dialog does not clear the work table

before loading the STATMON data. However, the STATMON loader does

not overwrite a table row that contains data about an existing resource.

The dialog assumes that you do not want to replace existing customized

resource information with STATMON data containing only information

added by defaults and definition rules.

Importing data from an external file

The dialog uses only the import function �3�. The dialog has an option to

clear the work table before importing data.

1

32

STATMONloader

Import

Worktable

DB loader

Database

NW_RESOURCEtable

Figure 33. ISPF work table and the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 63

Updating the NW_RESOURCE table

After you finish working with the data in the work table, you must update the

NW_RESOURCE table. You perform the update by using the database update

function �1�. See Figure 34.

The dialog does not clear the work table after you update the database. The data

will still be present the next time you access the network administration dialog.

Exporting data

Figure 35 illustrates the functions involved in exporting data.

If you want to use the information in the NW_RESOURCE table outside Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS, you can export the data. The process of exporting the

data consists of these steps:

1. Use the database loader function �1� to load the information into the work

table.

2. Use the export function �2� to copy the work table to an external file. The

format of the external file is the same as that used by the import function.

Appendix B, “External Data File Format,” on page 171 describes the file format.

Performance considerations

The dialog’s reliance on the ISPF work table can lead to performance problems,

especially if your network has many resources. The larger the work table, the

worse the performance. Although you can load all the resource data for all the

domains in your network into the work table at one time, the performance of the

dialog would be slow and impractical. The recommended strategy for achieving

maximum performance from the network administration dialog is to work with

data from only one domain at a time and to keep the data in each domain to a

minimum by processing only the resource types needed for the installed

components.

1

Worktable

DB update

Database

NW_RESOURCEtable

Figure 34. ISPF work table and the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database

12ExportExternalfile

Worktable

DB Loader

Database

NW_RESOURCEtable

Figure 35. Exporting data from the NW_RESOURCE table

64 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

STATMON loader

To ensure that the Network Performance feature processes data accurately, you

must define information about all the resources (except LUs) in the network to the

NW_RESOURCE table. Entering all this data manually would be too

time-consuming, especially for a large network, so the network administration

dialog provides a way to load data from STATMON as a way to quickly build the

NW_RESOURCE table. The dialog uses the STATMON preprocessor output in

member DSINDEF.

Attention: You must copy the DSINDEF member to another member before you

use the STATMON data. The STATMON loader changes the contents of the

member containing the STATMON data.

The copied STATMON data contains the resource name, type, and description for

each network resource. The resource name is the key element in the

NW_RESOURCE table, although the Network Performance feature also uses the

resource type and description information. However, the NW_RESOURCE table

contains other information besides the data supplied by STATMON, so the dialog

must use resource defaults and definition rules to provide the additional

information. Figure 36 illustrates the parts of the STATMON loader.

Resource defaults

When you load STATMON data, you specify certain defaults that will apply to all

resources. When the dialog loads data from STATMON, it applies the defaults to

resource data, so all data contains the same set of defaults. Because the defaults

may not apply to some resources, you can use the editing functions of the network

administration dialog to change values for individual resources.

Definition rules

When loading data, the dialog uses certain rules to define information not

specified in the STATMON data or in the defaults. For example, the dialog creates

synonym names for cross-connection resources by combining the cross-domain

resource manager names from each end of the connection. If the information

created by the definition rules does not fit your installation, you can use the

editing functions of the network administration dialog to change individual

resource information.

Import

If you use a method other than STATMON to create a repository of network

resource information, you can still import that data into the Network Performance

Resourcedefaults

STATMONloader

Resource nameResource typeResource description

STATMON file

Definitionrules

Worktable

Figure 36. STATMON loader

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 65

feature to quickly create or update the NW_RESOURCE table. The STATMON

loader assumes that the STATMON data contains only the resource name, type,

and description, and provides resource defaults and definition rules to supply the

additional information required by the NW_RESOURCE table. The import function

assumes that data is already in the format required by the NW_RESOURCE table,

so the dialog loads the external data directly into the work table without changes

or additions from resource defaults or definition rules. To load data from an

external source into the Network Performance feature, the data must be in the

format described in Appendix B, “External Data File Format,” on page 171.

Attention: If you use the import function, the external file is the main source for

resource information. Never use the Network administration dialog or the

Administration dialog to change the data.

Editor

The network administration dialog provides extensive functions to help you edit

network resource data. You can edit whatever data is in the work table, whether

you loaded the data from STATMON, entered the data manually, or loaded the

data from the NW_RESOURCE table. The editor lets you perform global changes

or changes to individual resources. The global change function lets you change

certain information (such as synonym name or NCP name) for a selected group of

resources. The individual change function lets you change any information

associated with a single resource.

Do not use the editor to change resource data loaded using the network

administration dialog’s import function. These changes are not reflected in the

external source, which is the primary repository for resource information, so the

NW_RESOURCE table no longer indicates the true state of the network.

If you are working with data from STATMON, only use the editor to change

information added by the network administration dialog when loading the data.

The dialog adds information such as service levels by using resource defaults, and

information such as cross-domain resource names by using definition rules. If the

information describing network resources changes, rerun STATMON and reload

the data, rather than changing the data in the dialog.

Export

If you must use the data in the NW_RESOURCE table in another application, the

dialog provides a function to export the data to an external file. Appendix B,

“External Data File Format,” on page 171 contains the format of the exported file.

Verify

When you make changes to the data in the work table, you may want to verify

that the changes do not introduce errors. The dialog provides a function to verify

the resource data by checking these items:

v Each cluster entry is attached to a valid line entry and a valid NCP entry.

v Each line entry is attached to a valid NCP entry.

v Each resource entry is attached to a valid group entry.

You should not have to verify data that you have just loaded from STATMON or

an external source, because this data represents the actual state of the network. If

the verification process located problems with newly loaded data, the problems

would be in the actual network, rather than the resource data.

66 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Database update

After you finish working with the data in the work table, update the

NW_RESOURCE table in the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database for the

Network Performance feature so you can use the data. When you load data into

the dialog using the STATMON loader or the import function, the dialog loads the

data into the work table, so you must update the database to load the data into the

NW_RESOURCE table. When you change the data in the NW_RESOURCE table,

the dialog copies the data from the NW_RESOURCE table into the work table, so

you must update the database to load the changed data back into the

NW_RESOURCE table.

Database loader

If you want to use the dialog to edit or verify the data in the NW_RESOURCE

table, you must load the data into the work table. When you load the data into the

work table, the dialog copies the data into the work table and leaves the existing

data in the NW_RESOURCE table intact so the Network Performance feature can

continue to operate. Because editing changes are to the copied data, rather than the

original, you must run the database update function to copy the changed data

from the work table back into the NW_RESOURCE table.

Overview of administration dialog tasks

This section describes the main tasks you can perform with the network

administration dialog. The main function of the network administration dialog is to

maintain the NW_RESOURCE table. The dialog provides two methods for this:

v Use data from STATMON

v Use data from an external source

This section briefly describes the process for working with each type of data. The

sections after this one provide detailed descriptions of the procedures for working

with the dialog.

Administration tasks with STATMON data

The procedure for working with STATMON data is the same regardless of whether

you are working with data from one network domain or several domains. The

procedure for working with STATMON data is:

1. Use the network administration dialog to set the defaults for the STATMON

data.

2. Load the STATMON data into the NW_RESOURCE table. Loading the data

involves:

a. Clearing the work table

b. Loading the STATMON data into the work table

c. Updating the database (NW_RESOURCE table)3. Change the data in the NW_RESOURCE table as needed. This is an ongoing

process. Changing the data in the NW_RESOURCE table involves:

a. Clearing the work table

b. Loading the data from the NW_RESOURCE table into the work table

c. Editing the data

d. Verifying the data

e. Updating the database (NW_RESOURCE table)

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 67

4. Add new resources to the existing resource data. Depending on the number of

new resources involved, you can either add the new data using the editing

functions of the network administration dialog or load a new copy of the

STATMON data and merge that data with the existing data. While loading new

STATMON data, the dialog compares the resource names in the new and

existing data. If the resource names match, the dialog does not load the data for

that resource. If the dialog finds a resource name in the new STATMON data

that is not in the existing data, the data for that resource is added to the

resource data.

Administration tasks with data from an external source

If you are using data from an external source, this is the procedure for working

with the data:

1. From the external source, create a data set containing the data to be imported

into Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS. The data must be in the format

described in Appendix B, “External Data File Format,” on page 171.

2. Set the resource defaults in the Edit Resource Defaults window. Although the

import function does not use many of these defaults (such as STATMON data

set name), you must specify all the defaults in this window in order to specify

the output data set name. The dialog uses the output data set name when

updating the database, so you must specify this default. The dialog does not

allow you to specify only this default, so you must specify all the defaults.

Attention: If you do not use this approach, you will not be able to load data

from the NW_RESOURCE table, although you will still be able to update the

NW_RESOURCE table.

3. Use the import resource data option to import data from the external source

into the network administration dialog. The dialog does not change the data as

it is being imported.

4. After the resource data is loaded into the NW_RESOURCE table, the Network

Performance feature can begin using the data. Because this data is maintained

in an external file, you must not use the network administration dialog to

change the data in the NW_RESOURCE table.

5. If the network resource data changes, use the import function to import an

updated copy of the external resource data.

6. If you need to back up the resource data or use the data in another application,

use the export function to export a copy of the data in the NW_RESOURCE

table.

Working with STATMON data

If you use data from the STATMON preprocessor, you can use that data in the

NW_RESOURCE table, which ensures that the resource data in Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS is identical to that defined for VTAM. If your network has more

than one domain, you should work with the data for each domain separately,

rather than loading resource data for the entire network into the work table at

once. Loading data for too many resources into the work table decreases the

performance of the network administration dialog. The basic procedure for

building the NW_RESOURCE table from STATMON data is:

1. Run the STATMON preprocessor.

2. Set the defaults for network resources in the network administration dialog.

3. Load the STATMON data into the dialog work table.

4. Change the resource information if necessary.

68 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

5. Process the database update statements to load the data in the work table into

the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database.

Producing resource data using STATMON

To produce an output data set containing network resource information, run the

STATMON preprocessor. For input data, use the VTAMLST statements that define

the network. You should create a separate data set for each domain in your

network. STATMON ignores resources containing the parameter STATOPT=OMIT

and Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS does not include these resources in the Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS database.

The STATMON preprocessor output data set is hierarchically ordered and contains

one record for each major and minor node in the network.

Attention: Do not edit this data set. Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS requires the

data set to be in the format created by NetView, and any changes could cause

unpredictable results.

See Appendix A, “Appendix A, “Sample STATMON Inputs and Outputs”” for an

example of network resource information produced using STATMON.

Loading STATMON data into the work table

After you create a data set containing STATMON output describing your network,

load the data into the network administration dialog ISPF work table. Figure 37

provides an overview of the windows involved in this process.

To load resource data from the STATMON processor, follow these steps:

1. From the Administration window menu bar, select the Utilities pull-down (refer

to the Guide to Reporting Dialog for more information on using the menu bar).

Type 1 and press Enter.

The Network Administration Primary Option window (Figure 38) appears.

Figure 37. Window flow: Loading STATMON data

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 69

2. Type 1 and press Enter.

The Set Defaults and Load Data window (Figure 39) appears.

If you are loading resource data for the first time, no resource data is present

and only option 1, Create, is available.

3. Type 1 beside **NEW** and press Enter.

Network Administration: Primary Option

Select one of these options:

__ 1. Set defaults and load data

2. Change resource data

3. Verify the work table

4. Update the Tivoli Decision Support for OS/390 database

5. Export resource data

6. Import resource data

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 38. Network Administration Primary Option window

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

Type an action code beside the system ID you want to select.

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action System ID System description

_ **NEW**

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 39. Set Defaults and Load Data window

70 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

After you have defined resource data to the feature, you can type 1 beside the

name of your defined system and press Enter to edit the defaults for that

system.

The Edit Resource Defaults window (Figure 40) appears.

4. Fill in these fields on the window:

System identifier

Type a unique system identifier. You can use the MVS ID from

the SMF records contained in the system log that you intend to

use. If you are collecting data from several network domains,

you must use different system IDs for each domain.

System description

Type a short description of the domain.

CDRM name Type the cross-domain resource manager name that represents

the VTAM on the domain.

STATMON data set

Type the data set name and member that contains the

STATMON output for the domain. Enclose the member name

in parentheses.

Output data set name

Type the name of the data set that will contain the database

update commands. Allocate a partitioned data set with fixed

80-byte records. Choose an appropriate block size for your

DASD device (sizes of 6160 and 23440 are suitable for 3380 and

3390 devices). Choosing a half-track block size reduces I/O

time.

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Edit Resource Defaults |

| |

| Enter the defaults that apply to the resource data that you are loading. |

| |

| System identifier . . . . IP01 CDRM name . . . SA23 |

| System description . . . TEST SYSTEM |

| STATMON data set . . . . DRL151.SDRLDEFS(DRLSTAT1) |

| Output data set name . . userid.EPDMDEFS |

| |

| Application availability 95 Stability . . 1 |

| Cluster availability . . 95 Stability . . 1 |

| Connection availability . 95 Stability . . 1 |

| Transit time objective . 95 |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F9=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 40. Edit Resource Defaults window

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 71

Application availability

Specify the default setting for availability, in percent, of

application resources. The availability component uses this

default value.

Application stability

Specify the stability, in number of down events for application

resources per scheduled period. For example, if the stability

objective is 3 down events per month (30 days) and the

schedule period is 1 day, the value for this field is 0.1. The

availability component uses this default value.

Cluster availability

Type the default setting for availability, in percent, of cluster

resources, or physical units (PUs). The availability component

uses this default value.

Cluster stability

Specify the stability, in number of down events for cluster

resources per scheduled period. For example, if the stability

objective is 3 down events per month (30 days) and the

schedule period is 1 day, the value for this field is 0.1. The

availability component uses this default value.

Connection availability

Type the default setting for availability, in percent, of

cross-connection resources. The availability component uses this

default value.

Connection stability

Specify the stability, in number of down events for

cross-connection resources per scheduled period. For example,

if the stability objective is 3 down events per month (30 days)

and the schedule period is 1 day, the value for this field is 0.1.

The availability component uses this default value.

Transit time objective

Type the objective, in percent, for the percentage of transactions

meeting the transit time objective. The NPM transit time

component uses this default value.5. After filling in all the fields, press Enter.

The Load Options window (Figure 41) appears.

72 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

6. To load STATMON data for the first time, type 1 and press Enter. The dialog

clears the ISPF work table and loads the STATMON data into the table.

Note: Depending on the size of your STATMON data set, this process can take

a lot of time.

The Set Defaults and Load Data window reappears and displays a message

indicating that the loading of data is complete.

Changing resource information

After you have loaded the resource data from STATMON into the work table, you

change the data. You can change any of the information for an individual resource

or change information for groups of resources. The changes you can make to

groups of resources include:

v Grouping resources

v Creating synonym names

v Including resources in availability processing

v Setting specific stability thresholds

See “Changing resource data” on page 77 for information about changing resource

information.

If you make changes to the resource information, you must verify those changes.

See “Verifying resource data” on page 98 for information on verifying the resource

information in the work table.

Updating the database

After you have loaded and changed the data in the work table, you must update

the NW_RESOURCE table in the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database. You

need not update the database before you complete every network administration

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Load Options |

| |

| Select the way the resource data is loaded: |

| |

| 1 1. Load STATMON data. |

| 2. Load database table. |

| 3. Merge STATMON data and database table. |

| 4. Add STATMON data to the work table. |

| |

| Use the choices as follows: |

| |

| 1. Use this to build a new resource table. |

| 2. Use this to make minor changes to your resource table. |

| 3. Use this to update your resource table with new STATMON data. |

| 4. Use this to combine STATMON data from multiple systems. |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

------------------------

| Process system IPO1. |

------------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 41. Load Options window

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 73

dialog session, because the work you have performed is saved in the work table

until you overwrite the table with new data. You only need to update the database

when you have completed making changes to the resource data. Figure 42 provides

an overview of the main windows in the network administration dialog.

To update the database, follow these steps:

1. From the Network Administration Primary Option window (see Figure 38 on

page 70), type 4 and press Enter.

The Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Database Update window (Figure 43)

appears.

2. To select the system for which you want to create update commands, type 1

beside the system ID and press Enter.

The Process Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Statements window (Figure 44 on

page 75) appears.

Figure 42. Window flow: Updating the database

Tivoli Decision Support for OS/390 Database Update ROW 1 TO 1 OF 1

Select the system that you want to update the Tivoli Decision Support for OS/390 database with.

1 - Select

S System ID System description

_ IPO1 TEST SYSTEM

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 43. Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Database Update window

74 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

3. Type 1 in the Type of statements field and press F5 (Execute).

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS processes the database update commands and

displays messages indicating whether the commands were executed

successfully.

4. Press F3 to return to the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Statements window.

5. Press F12 to return to the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Database Update

window.

Loading data from multiple domains into NW_RESOURCE

If your network contains more than one domain, you can still use STATMON to

load the network resource data into the NW_RESOURCE table. Run STATMON

once for each domain in your network. Use the VTAMLST statements for that

domain as input data, and write the output to a different data set or member for

each domain.

It is recommended that, for performance reasons, you work with only one domain

at a time. Update the NW_RESOURCE table and clear the work table before

loading the STATMON (or external source) data for the next domain.

To use STATMON data from multiple domains, load the data from each domain

separately, using a different system ID to identify the data from each domain.

Figure 45 on page 76 illustrates this method, which is described in the remainder

of this section.

Tivoli Decision Support for OS/390 Reporter Database Update ROW 1 TO 1 OF 1

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Process Tivoli Decision Support for OS/390 Reporter Statements |

| |

| Type the data set name. Then press Enter to edit the statements. |

| |

| Input data set name userid.EPDMDEFS |

| |

| Type of statements . . . . __ 1. Log collector |

| 2. Report definition |

| |

| Show input statements . . . 2 1. Yes |

| 2. No |

| |

| Trace SQL calls . . . . . . 2 1. Yes |

| 2. No |

| |

| F1=Help F5=Execute F12=Cancel |

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

------------------------------

| 685 records were processed.|

------------------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 44. Process Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Statements window

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 75

If you use data from STATMON, and have a multiple-domain network, follow

these steps:

1. Run the STATMON preprocessor for all applicable domains.

2. Set the defaults for network resources in the first domain in the network

administration dialog.

3. Load the STATMON data from the first domain into the dialog work table.

4. Update the database with the data from the first domain.

5. Set the defaults for network resources in the next domain.

6. Load the STATMON data from the next domain into the work table.

7. Update the database with the data from the next domain.

Loading STATMON data from the first domain

Use the process described in “Working with STATMON data” on page 68 to load

the STATMON data for the first domain. Load the data for the first domain into

the work table, change the data if necessary, and update the database.

Loading STATMON data from the second domain

After you have loaded the STATMON data from the first domain into

NW_RESOURCE, you can load the data from the second domain. To merge the

data, follow these steps:

1. From the Network Administration Primary Option window (see Figure 38 on

page 70), type 1 and press Enter.

The Set Defaults and Load Resource data window appears (see Figure 39 on

page 70).

2. Type 1 beside **NEW** and press Enter.

The Edit Resource Defaults window appears (see Figure 40 on page 71).

3. Type information in all the fields. You must specify a unique system ID for

each domain in your network to keep the resource data separate. When you

have filled in all the fields, press Enter.

The Load Options window (Figure 41) appears.

4. To load STATMON data from the second domain into the work table, type 1

and press Enter.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS loads the STATMON data into the work table.

The Set Defaults and Load Data window reappears and displays a message

indicating that the loading of data is complete.

Figure 45. Loading data from one domain at a time

76 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

5. If you need to make any changes to the resource data, use the procedure

described in “Changing resource data.” If you change the data, verify the data

using the procedure described in “Verifying resource data” on page 98.

6. After you have loaded the resource data into the work table and made any

required changes, you must update the database. Use the procedure described

in “Updating the database” on page 73 to update the database with the

resource data from domain 2.

If you have data from any other network domains, repeat the procedure to load

the resource data into the work table and update the database.

Changing resource data

When you load resource data into the work table, whether the data is new data

from STATMON or an external source or existing data from the Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS database, you can modify the data. The changes you can make

to the resource information include:

v Specifying synonym names

v Assigning resources to resource groups

v Specifying resources to be included in availability processing or reporting

v Specifying service-level thresholds

The network administration dialog provides search functions to let you narrow the

list of displayed resources to include resources that contain only specified criteria.

After the dialog displays the resources, you can change any value in an individual

resource, or change selected values for all displayed resources. Figure 46 illustrates

the process of changing data currently contained in the NW_RESOURCE table.

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 77

To change existing data in the database, follow these steps:

1. Select the system whose data you want to change.

The dialog retrieves the information from the database and loads it into the

dialog work table.

2. Use the Search1 and Search2 function keys to select the specific resource data

you want to change.

3. Use the Change function key to change the selected resource information.

4. Use the Change Resource Data windows to change specific resources.

5. When you finish making changes, verify the resource information.

6. Use the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database update function to load the

data from the work table back into the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

database.

Figure 47 provides an overview of the windows involved in this process.

Figure 46. Changing existing data

78 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Loading data from the database

To load the data from the database into the work table, follow these steps.

1. From the Network Administration Primary Option window (see Figure 38 on

page 70), type 1 and press Enter.

The Set Defaults and Load Data window (Figure 48) appears.

Because the database already contains resource data, this window lists one or

more system IDs.

2. Type 1 in the Action field beside the ID of the system whose data you want to

change, and press Enter.

The Edit Resource Defaults window appears (see Figure 40 on page 71). The

fields in this window contain the information you specified when you initially

loaded the data from STATMON into Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS.

Figure 47. Window flow: Changing existing data

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

Type an action code beside the system ID you want to select.

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action System ID System description

_ **NEW**

_ IPO1 TEST SYSTEM

_ IPO2 TEST SYSTEM 2

_ IPO3 TEST SYSTEM 3

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 48. Loading data from the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 79

3. Press Enter.

The Load Options window (Figure 49) appears.

4. To load the data from the database table into the work table, type 2 and press

Enter. Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS clears the work table and loads the

data from the database into the work table. The Set Defaults and Load Data

window reappears and displays a message indicating that the loading of data is

complete.

Modifying resource information

After you load resource data into the work table, you can use the editing functions

of the network administration dialog to make changes to the data.

To change the data, the dialog provides these functions:

Search1 function key (F4)

Searches for resources belonging to a specified application control block

(ACB), group, alternate group, line, NCP, or synonym

Search2 function key (F5)

Searches for resources that match a specified series of conditions for the

resource and system names, resource type, and status

Change function key (F6)

Performs global changes on all resources in a selection list

Save command

Saves the work table

Deleteall command

Deletes all resources displayed in a selection list

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Load Options |

| |

| Select the way the resource data is loaded: |

| |

| 2 1. Load STATMON data. |

| 2. Load database table. |

| 3. Merge STATMON data and database table. |

| 4. Add STATMON data to the work table. |

| |

| Use the choices as follows: |

| |

| 1. Use this to build a new resource table. |

| 2. Use this to make minor changes to your resource table. |

| 3. Use this to update your resource table with new STATMON data. |

| 4. Use this to combine STATMON data from multiple systems. |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-----------------------

| Process system IPO1.|

-----------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 49. Loading data from the database into the work table

80 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Changes to individual resources

Lets you change an individual resource entry

Figure 50 illustrates the windows you can use when changing resource

information.

Displaying resources

To modify resource data, first load the data into the ISPF work table. Use these

procedures:

v “Working with STATMON data” on page 68 or “Loading data from multiple

domains into NW_RESOURCE” on page 75 to load data from STATMON

v “Loading data from an external source into NW_RESOURCE” on page 102 to

load data from an external source

v “Changing resource data” on page 77 to load data from the Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS database

After loading the resource data into the work table, modify the resource data by

following these steps:

1. In the Network Administration Primary Option window (see Figure 38 on page

70), type 2 and press Enter.

Figure 50. Windows for changing resource information

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 81

The Change Resource Data window (Figure 51) appears.

The Change Resource Data window displays a selection list of network

resources. The selection list is a set of resources upon which you want to

perform some type of change. You specify the resources to be included in the

list by using the Search1 and Search2 function keys. When the desired resources

are displayed, you can make changes by using the Change function key, the

save or deleteall commands, or by selecting and changing individual resource

entries.

When you change the resources using the Change Resource Data window, you

are working on a copy of the work table. The work table is not changed until

you save your work or exit the change resource function.

Using the Search1 function key

The Search1 function key creates a selection list containing resources belonging to a

specified ACB, group, line, NCP, or synonym. Figure 52 illustrates the action

performed by Search1.

To use the Search1 function key, follow these steps:

1. In the Change Resource Data window, press F4.

The Set Search1 Values window (Figure 53) appears.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

Currently used search argument: SEARCH2 use PF5 to alter.

GROUP EQ *

--> NAME EQ * TYPE EQ * SYSID EQ * STATUS EQ *

Type one or more action codes to do the following:

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action Name Type System id Status

_ **NEW** * * D

_ AAUTCNMI APPL IPO1 O

_ APPCBRDG APPL IPO1 O

_ ATSO APPL IPO1 D

_ ATSO0001 APPL IPO1 D

_ ATSO0002 APPL IPO1 D

_ BNJHWMON APPL IPO1 O

_ DAS00001 APPL IPO1 O

_ DAS00002 APPL IPO1 O

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 51. Change Resource Data window

Work table

ResourceResource

Work tableSet Search1 values

1. ACB name2. Group3. Line4. NCP5. Synonym

MY*

Type

Search for

2Selectionlist Selection

list

ABCDABCECDEFA001ABCE

ABCDCDEFA001

MYLINEYOURLINEMYLINEMYLINEYOURLINE

MYLINEMYLINEMYLINE

GroupGroup

Figure 52. Changing the selection list using Search1

82 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

2. Fill in this information:

Search pattern

Type characters to be used as a pattern for selecting resources. You can

use an asterisk (*) at the end of a string as a global search character. For

example, a search pattern of ABC* locates all resources whose names

begin with the characters ABC. However, a search pattern of *ABC will

locate only resources named *ABC.

Field to search for

Select the field name against which the search pattern is to be applied.

For example, use a search pattern of ABC* and specify Group as the field

to search for to tell Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS to locate all

resources whose associated group name begins with ABC.3. Press Enter.

The Change Resource Data window appears and lists the resources matching

your search criteria.

You can now change the resources displayed in the list.

Using the Search2 function key

The Search2 key creates a list of all resources that match a specified series of

conditions covering the resource and system names, the resource type, and the

status. Figure 54 illustrates the action performed by Search2.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Set Search1 Values |

| |

| Enter a search pattern for one of the fields below. Use Search2 instead to |

| search on resource name and type, system ID, and status. |

| |

| Search pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . * |

| |

| Field to search for . . . . . . . . . 2 1. ACB name |

| 2. Group |

| 3. Alternate group |

| 4. Line |

| 5. NCP |

| 6. Synonym |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ APPCBRDG APPL IPO1 O

_ ATSO APPL IPO1 D

_ ATSO0001 APPL IPO1 D

_ ATSO0002 APPL IPO1 D

_ BNJHWMON APPL IPO1 O

_ CDRMGRP GROUP IPO1 O

_ DAS00001 APPL IPO1 O

_ DAS00002 APPL IPO1 O

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 53. Set Search1 Values window

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 83

To use the Search2 function key, follow these steps:

1. From the Change Resource Data window, press F5.

The Set Search2 Values window (Figure 55) appears.

2. Enter this information:

Resource name

Type characters to use as a search pattern for the resource name. You

can use an asterisk (*) as a global search character.

Resource type

Specify the resource type to be used in the search. Press F6 to cycle

through all possible resource types automatically. Type the global

search character (*) to specify all resource types.

System ID

Type characters to use as a search pattern for the system name. The

global search character (*) specifies all system names.

Status Type one of these values:

Figure 54. Changing the selection list using Search2

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Set Search2 Values |

| |

| Set the search patterns and the search conditions that you want. You can |

| press F6 (Cycle) to step through the valid resource types. |

| |

| Resource name . . * Resource type . . * |

| System ID . . . . * Status . . . . . . * |

| |

| Resource name Resource type System ID |

| condition condition condition Status condition |

| 1 1. EQ 1 1. EQ 1 1. EQ 1 1. EQ |

| 2. NE 2. NE 2. NE 2. NE |

| 3. GT 3. GT 3. GT 3. GT |

| 4. GE 4. GE 4. GE 4. GE |

| 5. LT 5. LT 5. LT 5. LT |

| 6. LE 6. LE 6. LE 6. LE |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F6=Cycle F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ BNJHWMON APPL IPO1 O

_ CDRMGRP GROUP IPO1 O

_ CNMATPNS GROUP IPO1 O

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 55. Set Search2 Values window

84 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

N Select resources loaded from STATMON that have not been

added to the database or resources manually added to the work

table.

O Select resources loaded from STATMON or an external database

that have been added to the database.

D Select resources present in the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

database but not in the STATMON or external data.

* Any status.

This field is only meaningful if you have added STATMON data to

data already in the work table.

Condition fields

This category includes these fields: resource name condition, resource

type condition, system condition, and status condition. These fields

specify how to use the search pattern entered in the corresponding

field. The possible values are:

EQ Equal to. Display names that match the search pattern.

NE Not equal to. Display names that do not match the search

pattern.

GT Greater than. Display names that are alphabetically or

numerically higher than the search pattern. For example,

specifying GT with a search pattern of DB displays all names

beginning with DBA through Z.

GE Greater than or equal to. Display names that match the search

pattern or are alphabetically or numerically higher. For

example, specifying GE with a search pattern of JB displays all

names beginning with JB through Z.

LT Less than. Display names that are alphabetically or numerically

lower than the search pattern. For example, specifying LT with

a search pattern of DB displays all names beginning with A

through DA.

LE Less than or equal to. Display names that match the search

pattern or are alphabetically or numerically lower. For example,

specifying LE with a search pattern of JB displays all names

beginning with A through JB.3. Press Enter.

The Change Resource Data window reappears and displays the resources that

meet your search criteria.

You can now change the resources displayed in the list.

Using the Change function key

The Change function key lets you make global changes to all the resources

contained in the current selection list. To modify the resources displayed in the

selection list, use the Search1 or Search2 function keys. See “Using the Search1

function key” on page 82 for information on the Search1 key and “Using the

Search2 function key” on page 83 for information on the Search2 key.

To use the Change function key, follow these steps:

1. In the Change Resource Data window, press F6.

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 85

The Set Global Change Values window (Figure 56) appears.

2. Enter this information:

Change data to

Type the new value for the field you are going to change. Global search

characters (*) are not permitted.

Field to be changed

Specify the field in the currently selected resources that will be changed

using the specified replacement string.

3. Press Enter.

4. The Change Resource Data window reappears. All entries contain the changed

information, although that information may not be visible on this window.

Deleting individual resource entries

To delete an entry in the current selection list, place the cursor beside that entry,

type 2, and press Enter.

The entry is deleted from the selection list, although it is not deleted from the

work table until you save your changes. See Using the save command for

information on saving your changes. See Using the deleteall command for

information on deleting a group of entries.

Using the save command

Use the save command to save work in progress. When you type the command on

the command line, all the changes you have made to entries in the selection list are

saved to the work table, and you can perform additional administration tasks.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Set Global Change Values |

| |

| Type the new value and the code for the field to be changed. Only |

| currently selected resources will be changed. |

| |

| Change data to . . . . . . ________ |

| |

| Field to be changed . . . 1 1. Group |

| 2. Alternate group |

| 3. Line |

| 4. NCP |

| 5. Synonym |

| 6. System ID |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ APPCBRDG APPL IPO1 O

_ ATSO APPL IPO1 D

_ ATSO0001 APPL IPO1 D

_ ATSO0002 APPL IPO1 D

_ BNJHWMON APPL IPO1 O

_ CDRMGRP GROUP IPO1 O

_ CNMATPNS GROUP IPO1 O

_ CNMIC APPL IPO1 O

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 56. Set Global Change Values window

86 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Issue this command periodically to ensure that you do not lose any changes. When

you press F12 (Cancel), Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS discards all changes

made since the last save command.

You can also save changes when you leave the network administration dialog.

When you press F3 (Exit) from the Change Resource Data window, a window

appears asking if you want to save changes. If you select the save changes option,

your changes are saved to the work table and the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

Network Administration window reappears.

Although the data in the work table is not added to the database until you

perform a database update, the data remains in the work table until you load new

data into the table.

Using the deleteall command

Type the deleteall command on the command line to delete all the entries in the

current selection list. The command does not delete all the entries in the work table

but only those entries you have selected using the Search1 and Search2 function

keys. The deleteall command is quicker than deleting individual entries.

Changing individual resource entries

To change an individual resource, rather than performing a global change, perform

these steps:

1. From the Change Resource Data window, place the cursor beside the resource

you want to change and type 1.

The Change resource Resource Data window appears, where resource is the type

of resource being modified. The contents of the window differ depending on

the type of resource being modified, although many fields are common to all of

the windows. The common fields are:

Resource name

Type the name of the resource (up to 8 characters).

Resource type

Type one of these:

v APPL (application)

v NCP

v LINE

v CLUSTER

v CONN (cross-connection)

v GROUP

v LOCAL

v SWITCHED

System identifier

Type the identifier of the system that owns the resource (up to 4

characters). This identifier can be the same as the system identifier in

the SMF records. Some resources, such as groups and NCPs, belong to

all systems, rather than to any one system ID. These resources have a

system ID of * to indicate that they are shared. These resources are

always updated whenever you update the database with information

from a specific system.

Synonym name

Type the synonym name (up to 8 characters). The Network

Performance feature stores this name as the resource name. See

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 87

“Changing the NCP resource data” on page 116, “Changing application

resources environment data” on page 122, and “Changing the

cross-connection resource environment data” on page 128 for examples

of creating synonym names for specific resource types.

Group name

Type the name of the group to which the resource belongs (up to 8

characters). The Network Performance feature stores this name in the

NW_RESOURCE table and uses the name in group reports.

The Network Performance feature automatically places NCP resources

in the group NCPGRP. The feature places resources that belong to a

particular NCP in the group ncpG, where ncp is the name of the NCP.

The feature also automatically creates a group named ERRORGRP that

is used for resources that are identified during a collect, but that do not

have entries defined in the NW_RESOURCE table.

Alternate group name

Type the name of an alternate group to which the resource belongs. The

alternate group field lets you assign a resource to more than one group.

This information is not used in Network Performance feature reports.

NCP/CTC name

This field is used only for cluster and line resources. Type the NCP

(synonym) or CTC (channel to channel) name (up to 7 characters).

Line name

This field is used only for cluster resources. Type the line name for the

connected resource (up to 8 characters).

ACB name

This field is used only for application resources. Type the application

ACB name (up to 8 characters). You must specify this field if you use

NPM to create SMF data for the Network Performance feature. NPM

writes the application ACB name instead of the VTAM resource name.

If the NPM has its own synonym name for this application, use the

NPM synonym instead of the ACB name.

Own CDRM name

This field is used only for cross-connection resources (up to 8

characters). Type the cross-domain resource manager (CDRM) name

representing the domain with which you are working. The dialog uses

the information in this field when creating the cross-connection

synonym name.

Availability

Type the availability service objective, in percent (from 0 to 100). This

field is not available if you select 1 (yes) in the multiple-task field. The

default value for this field, set on the Edit Resource Defaults window,

is 95%. If you are not using availability reports, type 0.

Stability

Type the stability-service objective, in number of down events during a

schedule (from 0 to 9.999). This field is not available if you select 1

(yes) in the multiple-task field. The default value for this field, set on

the Edit Resource Defaults window, is 1. If you are not using

availability reports, type 0.

Transit time

Type the transit-time objective, in percent. This field is not available if

88 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

you select 1 (yes) in the multiple-task field. The default value for this

field, set on the Edit Resource Defaults window, is 95%.

Resource description

Type a brief description of the resource (up to 20 characters).

Multiple task

Type 1 (yes) if the application is a multiple-task application; otherwise,

type 2 (no). TSO is an example of a multiple-task application. When a

user logs on to TSO, the session is initially established with terminal

control address space (TCAS), which then transfers the session to an

available TSOnnnn application. See Figure 57.

To report on all the TSOnnnn applications as a unit, set the

multiple-task indicator to YES for all the TSO applications, set the

indicator to NO for TCAS, and create a common synonym name to

identify all the applications. The multiple-task indicator ensures that

the data from all the TSO applications is combined. See “Changing

application resources environment data” on page 122 for more

information about working with multiple-task applications.

Availability process

Indicates whether the application should be included in availability

calculations. This field is not present if you select 1 (yes) in the

Multiple-task field.

Availability reports

Indicates whether Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS should include this

application in availability reports.

Resource status

Indicates the status of the resource. 1 (New) indicates that the resource

is new and is inserted by the external process. If merging new

STATMON data with existing data, this value identifies the resource as

part of the new STATMON data. 2 (Old) indicates that the resource

already exists. If merging new STATMON data with existing data, this

value identifies the resource as part of the existing resource data.

3 (Missing) indicates that the resource is not found in the external data.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS does not automatically delete the

resource, because information about this resource still exists on the

database.

User

TCAS

TSO0001

1 - User logs onto TSO

2 - TCAS transfers session

TSO0009

M V S

. . . . .

Figure 57. Multiple task with TSO

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 89

To reset a field to its default value, press F10.

The following table shows you where to look for more information on each

resource type.

Table 20. Information on modifying resources

Resource type Section

Application “Changing application data” on page 90

NCP “Changing NCP resource data” on page 92

Line “Changing line resource data” on page 93

Cluster “Changing cluster resource data” on page 94

Cross-connection “Changing cross-connection resource data” on page 95

Group “Changing group resource data” on page 96

Local “Changing local resource data” on page 97

Switched “Changing switched resource data” on page 98

2. After you have modified a specific resource, press Enter to save the

modifications or F12 to cancel.

3. After you have modified all resources, press F3.

The Confirm Changes pop-up (Figure 58) appears.

4. Type 1 to accept the changes, or type 2 to abandon the changes. Then press

Enter.

The Network Administration Primary Option window reappears.

Changing application data

If you select an application to change or create, the Change Application Resource

Data window (Figure 59) appears.

Network Administration: Primary Option

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Confirm Changes |

| |

| Do you want to commit your changes to the work table? Select one: |

| |

| |

| 1 1. Save latest changes (default) |

| 2. Discard latest changes |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 58. Confirm Changes pop-up

90 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

See “Changing individual resource entries” on page 87 for information on the

fields in this window.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change Application Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes to this application resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . AB6K4TEH Resource type . . . . . : APPL |

| System identifier . . . . IPO1 Synonym name . . . . . . . AB6K4TEH |

| Group name . . . . . . . . ABZ6V10U Alternate group name . . . NONE |

| ACB name . . . . . . . . . ________ |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Transit time in % . . . . 95 |

| Resource description . . . APPLICATION |

| |

| Multiple Availability Availability Resource |

| task process reports status |

| 2 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. No 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ CNMATPNS GROUP IPO1 O

_ CNMIC APPL IPO1 O

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 59. Change Application Resource Data window

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 91

Changing NCP resource data

If you selected an NCP to change or create, the Change NCP Resource Data

window (Figure 60) appears.

See “Changing individual resource entries” on page 87 for information on the

fields in this window.

When you load STATMON data into the work table, the feature places NCP

resources in the group NCPGRP. The resources belonging to an NCP are placed in

the group ncpG, where ncp is the name of the NCP.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change NCP Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes for this NCP resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . UCX4 Resource type . . . . . : NCP |

| System identifier . . . : * Synonym name . . . . . . . UCX4 |

| Group name . . . . . . . . NCPGRP Alternate group name . . . NONE |

| |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Resource description . . . NCP MAJOR NODE |

| |

| Availability process Availability reports Resource status |

| 1 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ CNMATPNS GROUP IPO1 O

_ CNMIC APPL IPO1 O

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 60. Change NCP Resource Data window

92 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Changing line resource data

If you select a line to change or create, the Change Line Resource Data window

(Figure 61) appears.

See “Changing individual resource entries” on page 87 for information on the

fields in this window.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change Line Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes to this line resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . BHDO9 Resource type . . . . . : LINE |

| System identifier . . . . IPO1 NCP name / CTC name . . . BG31TTU |

| Group name . . . . . . . . BG31TTU Alternate group name . . . NONE |

| |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Transit time in % . . . . 95 |

| Resource description . . . LINE |

| |

| Availability process Resource status |

| 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ CNMATPNS GROUP IPO1 O

_ CNMIC APPL IPO1 O

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 61. Change Line Resource Data window

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 93

Changing cluster resource data

If you select a cluster to change or create, the Change Cluster Resource Data

window (Figure 62) appears.

See “Changing individual resource entries” on page 87 for information on the

fields in this window.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change Cluster Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes to this cluster resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . BHTJSTG2 Resource type . . . . . : CLUSTER |

| System identifier . . . . IPO1 |

| Group name . . . . . . . . BG31TTU Alternate group name . . . NONE |

| NCP name / CTC name . . . BG31TTU Line name . . . . . . . . BHDO9 |

| |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Transit time in % . . . . 95 |

| Resource description . . . PU |

| |

| Availability process Availability reports Resource status |

| 1 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ CNMATPNS GROUP IPO1 O

_ CNMIC APPL IPO1 O

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 62. Change Cluster Resource Data window

94 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Changing cross-connection resource data

If you select a cross-connection to change or create, the Change Cross-connection

Resource Data window (Figure 63) appears.

See “Changing individual resource entries” on page 87 for information on the

fields in this window.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change Cross-connection Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes to this cross-connection resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . CDR2 Resource type . . . . . : CONN |

| System identifier . . . . IPO1 Synonym name . . . . . . . DRM2CDR2 |

| Group name . . . . . . . . CDRMGRP Alternate group name . . . NONE |

| Own CDRM name . . . . . . CDRM2 |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Resource description . . . CDRM |

| |

| Availability process Availability reports Resource status |

| 1 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F11=Defaults F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 63. Change Cross-connection Resource Data window

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 95

Changing group resource data

If you select a group to change or create, the Change Group Resource Data

window (Figure 64) appears.

See “Changing individual resource entries” on page 87 for information on the

fields in this window.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change Group Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes to this group resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . ACICSMAJ Resource type . . . . . : GROUP |

| System identifier . . . : * |

| |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Transit time in % . . . . 95 |

| Resource description . . . APPL MAJ NODE |

| |

| Availability process Availability reports Resource status |

| 1 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ CNMATPNS GROUP IPO1 O

_ CNMIC APPL IPO1 O

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 64. Change Group Resource Data window

96 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Changing local resource data

If you select a local resource to change or create, the Change Local Resource Data

window (Figure 65) appears.

See “Changing individual resource entries” on page 87 for information on the

fields in this window.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change Local Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes to this local resource. A local resource is a |

| channel-attached SNA terminal controller. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . LV5S Resource type . . . . . : LOCAL |

| System identifier . . . . IPO1 |

| Group name . . . . . . . . LVN1 Alternate group name . . . NONE |

| |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Resource description . . . LOCAL SNA PU |

| |

| Availability process Availability reports Resource status |

| 1 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 65. Change Local Resource Data window

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 97

Changing switched resource data

If you select a switched resource to change or create, the Change Switched

Resource Data window (Figure 66) appears.

See “Changing individual resource entries” on page 87 for information on the

fields in this window.

After you have changed the resource data, verify that the changes have not

introduced any errors.

Verifying resource data

After changing the resource data, verify that the data was changed correctly. The

dialog checks that the entries in the work table meet these criteria:

v Each cluster entry must be attached to a valid line entry.

v Each cluster entry must be attached to a valid NCP entry.

v Each line entry must be attached to a valid NCP entry.

v Each resource entry must be connected to a valid group entry.

To verify the data, follow these steps:

1. In the Network Administration Primary Option (Figure 38 on page 70) type 3

and press Enter.

The Confirm Selection pop-up (Figure 67) appears.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change Switched Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes to this switched resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . EN9V7 Resource type . . . . . : SWITCHED |

| System identifier . . . . IPO1 |

| Group name . . . . . . . . ENY8ST Alternate group name . . . NONE |

| Availability in % . . . . 0 Stability . . . . . . . . 0 |

| Resource description . . . SWITCHED PU |

| |

| Availability process Resource status |

| 2 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 66. Change Switched Resource Data window

98 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

2. Press Enter to continue the verification process, or press F12 to end the process.

If you press Enter, Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS verifies the contents of the

ISPF table. The Network Administration window appears and displays a

message indicating whether or not the table contains errors.

Updating the database

After you have verified the changed data, update the database to put the changed

data into the NW_RESOURCE table. See “Updating the database” on page 73 for

information on updating the database.

Adding resource data to NW_RESOURCE

When you add resources to your network, you must add information about these

resources to the NW_RESOURCE table. The network administration dialog

provides two methods for adding resource data, depending on the amount of data

you must add.

If you need to add data for a small number of resources, you can use the editing

function of the dialog to enter the resource data. If you have a significant number

of resources to add, you can load the new STATMON data normally. The dialog

adds the new resource data to the NW_RESOURCE table, but does not remove the

old data.

Network Administration: Primary Option

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Confirm Selection |

| |

| Press Enter to continue. Press Cancel (F12) to quit. |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

----------------------------------

| Process Verify Resource Tables |

----------------------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 67. Confirm Selection pop-up

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 99

Adding resource data using the editing function

To add resource data using the editing function of the network administration

dialog, follow these steps:

1. From the Change Resource Data window, type 1 beside **NEW** and press

Enter.

2. The Specify a New Resource window (Figure 68) appears.

3. Type the resource name and the resource type and press Enter.

The Change resource Resource Data window appears.

4. Enter the information about the resource and press Enter.

The Change Resource Data window appears.

5. When you have added information about all the new resources, verify the

resource data and update the database.

Adding resource data using STATMON

To add new resource data from the STATMON preprocessor output, follow these

steps:

1. Create a data set containing the STATMON output for the domain containing

the new resources.

2. From the Network Administration Primary Option window, type 1 and press

Enter.

The Set Defaults and Load Data window appears.

3. Type 1 beside the system ID to which you want to add data and press Enter.

The Edit Resource Defaults window appears.

4. The fields on this window will contain information, so make any changes to

the displayed values and press Enter.

5. The Load Options window (Figure 69 on page 101) appears.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 686

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Specify a New Resource |

| |

| Enter the name and type of the new resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . **NEW** Resource type . __ 1. Application |

| 2. Cluster |

| 3. Cross-connection |

| 4. Group |

| 5. Line |

| 6. Local |

| 7. NCP |

| 8. Switched |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ ADOWO APPL IPO1 N

_ ADUL5 APPL IPO1 N

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 68. Specify a New Resource window

100 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

6. To add STATMON to the data in the NW_RESOURCE table, type 3 and press

Enter.

The dialog merges the new STATMON data with the existing data in

NW_RESOURCE. When the dialog finds a resource in the STATMON data that

is not present in the existing data, the dialog adds data for that resource to the

existing data. When the dialog finds a resource that is present in the existing

data that is also in the new STATMON data, the dialog does not load the new

data for that resource.

The Set Defaults and Load Data window reappears and displays a message

indicating that the loading of data is complete.

To determine which resources were added, follow these steps:

1. From the Change Resource Data window, press F5.

The Set Search2 Values window appears.

2. Type N in the Status field and 1 in the Status condition field and press Enter.

The Change Resource Data window reappears and displays all the resources

added in the new STATMON data.

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Load Options |

| |

| Select the way the resource data is loaded: |

| |

| 3 1. Load STATMON data. |

| 2. Load database table. |

| 3. Merge STATMON data and database table. |

| 4. Add STATMON data to the work table. |

| |

| Use the choices as follows: |

| |

| 1. Use this to build a new resource table. |

| 2. Use this to make minor changes to your resource table. |

| 3. Use this to update your resource table with new STATMON data. |

| 4. Use this to combine STATMON data from multiple systems. |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

------------------------

| Process system IPO1. |

------------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 69. Merging new STATMON data into the database

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 101

Loading data from an external source into NW_RESOURCE

If you use no data from STATMON as the source for your Tivoli Decision Support

for z/OS resource information, you can import data from another external source

into Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS. The external source serves as the primary

repository for network resource information, so you must not change the resource

information after you update the NW_RESOURCE table with the information. Any

changes you make to the resource information using the network administration

dialog will not be present in the external source, and therefore will not reflect the

actual state of the network. The data must be in the format presented in

“Appendix B, “External Data File Format”” for the dialog to be able to use it.

Load data from the external source when you are first defining your network to

the Network Performance feature and whenever the network changes.

Figure 70 illustrates the process of loading data from an external source in the

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database.

If you use external data to create your database, follow these steps:

1. Set the defaults for network resources in the network administration dialog.

You must specify the name of a data set that you have already allocated in the

Output data set name field. The dialog requires that this value be present so

you can update the database. Because the dialog does not permit you to enter

only the value for that field, you must enter values for all fields, even though

the dialog does not use the information.

2. Load the external data into the dialog work table.

3. Verify the resource information.

4. Process the database update statements to load the data in the work table into

the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database.

Figure 71 on page 103 provides an overview of the windows involved in this

process.

Figure 70. Loading data from an external source

102 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Producing resource data using an external source

The required format of the external file is listed in “Appendix B, “External Data

File Format””. You must write a program to produce the external data file.

When you have produced the external file in the format required by Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS, you can import the data into the network

administration dialog.

When importing external data into the dialog, you can use one of these methods:

v Set defaults for external data

v Load external data without setting defaults

If you want to be able to change the output data set name for your external system

or you want to document your external system within the Network Performance

feature, use the procedures in “Setting defaults for external data.” Otherwise,

proceed to “Loading external data into the work table” on page 104. Using the

instructions in this section means that you will always load data from the external

repository and never use the Set Defaults and Load Data window.

Setting defaults for external data

Before you load the external resource data into the work table, you must specify

the output data set that the dialog uses when updating the database. To specify the

output data set name, follow these steps:

1. From the Network Administration Primary Option window, type 1 and press

Enter.

The Set Defaults and Load Data window (Figure 39) appears.

2. Type 1 beside **NEW** and press Enter.

The Edit Resource Defaults window (Figure 72) appears.

Figure 71. Window flow: Loading external data

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 103

3. Type the name of an allocated data set in the Output data set name field.

Allocate a partitioned data set with fixed 80-byte records. Choose an

appropriate block size for your DASD device (sizes of 6160 and 23440 are

suitable for 3380 and 3390 devices). Choosing a half-track block size reduces

I/O time.

All the fields on this window are required, so type values for all fields on the

window. The dialog does not use any of this information when working with

external data, so the values you enter are not critical.

4. Press Enter.

The Load Options window appears.

5. Type 1 and press Enter.

This step loads the specified STATMON file containing the default values for

external systems. The step creates entries in the system defaults work table.

6. Press F3 to return to the Network Administration Primary Option window.

Loading external data into the work table

After specifying the output data set name, you can load the external data into the

work table. To load resource data from an external source, follow these steps:

1. From the Network Administration Primary Option window, type 6 and press

Enter. The Define Data Set Name window (Figure 73 on page 105) appears.

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Edit Resource Defaults |

| |

| Enter the defaults that apply to the resource data that you are loading. |

| |

| System identifier . . . . IP01 CDRM name . . . SA23 |

| System description . . . TEST SYSTEM |

| STATMON data set . . . . DRL151.SDRLDEFS(DRLSTAT3) |

| Output data set name . . userid.EPDMDEFS |

| |

| Application availability 95 Stability . . 1 |

| Cluster availability . . 95 Stability . . 1 |

| Connection availability . 95 Stability . . 1 |

| Transit time objective . 95 |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F9=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 72. Edit Resource Defaults window

104 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

2. Type the name of the external data set and press Enter.

See Appendix B, “External Data File Format,” on page 171 for information

about the format of the external data set.

The Network Performance feature loads the external resource data into the ISPF

work table and the Network Administration Primary Option window

reappears.

Updating the database

After loading data from the external source into the work table, update the

database with the resource information contained in the work table. See “Updating

the database” on page 73 for information on updating the Tivoli Decision Support

for z/OS database.

Exporting data from the NW_RESOURCE table

You may need to export the resource data in the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

database for use in another application. Because the export function exports the

data currently in the work table, you must load the data from the database into the

work table before using the export function. Figure 74 provides an overview of the

windows for exporting data.

Network Administration: Primary Option

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Define Data Set Name |

| |

| Type the name of the external file for the resource data. This should be a |

| predefined data set. |

| |

| Data set name . . . . . . ____________________________________________ |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

------------------------

| Export resource data |

------------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 73. Define Data Set Name window

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 105

To export the data, follow these steps:

1. In the Network Administration Primary Option window, type 1 and press

Enter.

The Set Defaults and Load Data window appears (Figure 39 on page 70).

2. In the Set Defaults and Load Data window, type 1 beside the name of the

system whose data you want to export and press Enter.

The Load Options window (Figure 41 on page 73) appears.

3. Type 2 and press Enter.

The dialog clears the work table and loads the data from the database into the

work table.

4. In the Network Administration Primary Option window (Figure 38 on page 70),

type 5 and press Enter.

The Define Data Set Name window (Figure 75 on page 106) appears.

5. Type the name of the data set to contain the environment data, and press Enter.

The data set must be partitioned. It must use a variable blocked record format.

The record length must be at least 180 bytes, and the block size must be at least

Figure 74. Window flow: Exporting data

Network Administration: Primary Option

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Define Data Set Name |

| |

| Type the name of the external file for the resource data. This should be a |

| predefined data set. |

| |

| Data set name . . . . . . ____________________________________________ |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-----------------------

| Export resource data |

-----------------------

COMMAND ===> ________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 75. Define Data Set Name window

106 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

184 bytes. Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS automatically generates a member

in this data set with the name Ejjjhhmm, where:

E Indicates that the member contains exported data

jjj Specifies the Julian date when the data was exported

hh Specifies the hour when the data was exported

mm Specifies the minute when the data was exportedTivoli Decision Support for z/OS exports the data and the Network

Administration Primary Option window reappears.

The data in the external file uses the format described in Appendix B, “External

Data File Format,” on page 171.

Chapter 5. Working with the Administration dialog 107

108 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example

This chapter provides an example of the steps involved in defining network

resource information using the network administration dialog. The example uses

the sample network data supplied with the installation tape to completely define

the network, starting with STATMON output.

Chapter 5, “Working with the Network Performance feature Administration

dialog,” on page 61 describes the procedures used in this chapter. Appendix A,

“Sample STATMON Inputs and Outputs,” on page 167 lists an extract of the

sample data used in the example.

Understanding the sample network

The sample network contains commonly found resources and uses a common

configuration. The network consists of two domains, linked by a

channel-to-channel connection and consisting of these resources:

v One NCP, running in a 3725 controller

v One TSO application in the domain 1 host system, with each application

containing five applications for TSO users

v Lines, clusters, and terminals in each host system

v One IMS application in domain 1

v Local SNA PUs

Figure 76 on page 110 illustrates the network configuration.

109

Administration tasks for the sample data

Assume the product is installed. NetView is customized correctly, and the desired

reporting options are selected. In this example, the must report on:

v SNA availability

v RTM response time

v NPM transit time

v Service levels for the sample network

To define the sample network to Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS:

1. Load resource data. (STATMON supplied the data in this example.)

As part of loading the resource data, you define the host system.

Define the system identifier (SMF ID) and the name of the cross-domain

resource manager (CDRM) for the host system in domain 1. In this example,

HOST = SMF1

3725

NCP

UCX4

PU

PU

PU

PUCLSM010

TerminalsCLSM0101 - F

LineV40LKNF8

LU

LU

LU

HOST = SMF2

DOMAIN 1

DOMAIN 2

M V S

M V S

ACF/VTAM

ACF/VTAM

NET1

NET1

SSCP-1

SSCP-2

CDR1

CDR2

CDRMR1R2CTC

APPLS

APPLS

TSO

TSO

IMS

Figure 76. Sample network configuration

110 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

the SMF ID is SMF1 and the CDRM is CDR1. “Setting the resource default

values and loading the data” on page 112 describes this procedure.

2. Define the cross-connection.

Identify the cross-connection between the two domains in the network. In this

example, the cross-connection is set to CDRMR1R2. “Changing the

cross-connection resource environment data” on page 128 describes this

procedure.

3. Define the NCP.

The network has one 3725 communication controller running the NCP. The

name of the NCP is rotated after maintenance or modifications to the

configuration. The following table shows the current definition.

NCP name NCP version

UCX2 Old

UCX4 Current

UCX6 New

In this example, these resources will be reported using the synonym NCPUCX

rather than the individual NCP names. “Changing the NCP resource data” on

page 116 describes the procedure for defining this synonym.

4. Define lines and clusters.

In this example, you must make these changes to the line and cluster

information:

v Define the service-level agreement value for cluster availability throughout

the network. The cluster availability value is 95%. “Setting the resource

default values and loading the data” on page 112 describes the procedure

required to make this change.

v Report on lines and clusters by geographic location. This requires that data

be added to group resources to a geographic group. In this example, add

data to define line V40LKNF8 and all the clusters attached to it to be in

London in zone 1. These resources are reported under the group LONDON1.

“Changing resource data to group lines and clusters” on page 125 describes

these changes.5. Define applications.

The TSO and TSO user applications are currently defined in VTAM with the

application names and ACB names shown in the following table.

Application name ACB name

ATSO TSO

ATSO0001 TSO0001

ATSO0002 TSO0002

ATSO0003 TSO0003

ATSO0004 TSO0004

ATSO0005 TSO0005

However, ACB names are not written out by STATMON, so you must add the

names for each of these resources. In addition, the reports should use the

synonym name, PRODTSO, instead of the individual TSO user application

names. “Changing application resources environment data” on page 122

describes how to add the ACB names and the synonym name.

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 111

Loading the resource data for domain 1

The first step in defining the network configuration to Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS is loading the network resource data into the work table. To load the default

data:

1. Gather the network resource data.

2. Set the resource default values.

3. Load the resource data.

Because you perform the last two steps at the same time, they are described

together.

The following sections describe these steps for domain 1 in the sample network.

Gathering network resource data

In normal operation, the network resource data is created by running the

STATMON preprocessor using the current VTAMLST for each domain in your

network as input. However, for this example, the data set

DRL160.SDRLDEFS(DRLSTAT1) contains the STATMON output for domain 1. Define

this data set to the dialog in “Setting the resource default values and loading the

data.”

Setting the resource default values and loading the data

To set the resource default values and load the default data for the sample

network, follow these steps:

1. From the Utilities pull-down on the Administration menu bar, select the

Network option.

The Network Administration Primary Option window (Figure 77) appears.

Network Administration: Primary Option

Select one of these options:

__ 1. Set defaults and load data

2. Change resource data

3. Verify the work table

4. Update the Tivoli Decision Support for OS/390 database

5. Export resource data

6. Import resource data

Command ===> ___________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 77. Network Administration Primary Option window

112 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

2. Type 1 and press Enter to set the resource defaults and load the default data.

The Set Defaults and Load Data window (Figure 78) appears. The window lists

the systems defined to the .

3. Type 1 beside the **NEW** entry and press Enter.

The Edit Resource Defaults window appears (Figure 79 on page 114),

containing default values.

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

Type an action code beside the system ID you want to select.

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action System ID System description

_ **NEW**

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 78. List of defined systems

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 113

The variables in this window are merged with the STATMON data during the

load process, setting defaults for all applicable resources.

4. Enter these default resource values for domain 1:

System identifier SMF1

CDRM name CDR1

System description Sample system domain 1

STATMON data set DRL160.SDRLDEFS(DRLSTAT1)

Output data set userid.EPDMDEFS

Cluster availability 90%5. Press Enter to save the defaults for this system.

The Load Options window (Figure 80) appears.

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Edit Resource Defaults |

| |

| Enter the defaults that apply to the resource data that you are loading. |

| |

| System identifier . . . . SMF1 CDRM name . . . . CDR1____ |

| System description . . . Sample system domain 1___ |

| STATMON data set . . . . DRL151.SDRLDEFS(DRLSTAT1)___________________ |

| Output data set name . . userid.EPDMDEFS_____________________________ |

| |

| Application availability 95 Stability . . 1 |

| Cluster availability . . 95 Stability . . 1 |

| Connection availability . 95 Stability . . 1 |

| Transit time objective . 95 |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 79. Resource default values for a new system

114 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

6. The option to load STATMON data is selected by default, so press Enter.

The dialog loads the data from the STATMON data set and merges the data

with the default resource values. The merged data is saved in the dialog work

table, and the dialog displays the window shown in Figure 81, confirming that

the load has been successful.

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Load Options |

| |

| Select the way the resource data is loaded: |

| |

| 1 1. Load STATMON data. |

| 2. Load database table. |

| 3. Merge STATMON data and database table. |

| 4. Add STATMON data to the work table. |

| |

| Use the choices as follows: |

| |

| 1. Use this to build a new resource table. |

| 2. Use this to make minor changes to your resource table. |

| 3. Use this to update your resource table with new STATMON data. |

| 4. Use this to combine STATMON data from multiple systems. |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

------------------------

| Process system SMF1. |

------------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel

Figure 80. Load options window

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

Type an action code beside the system ID you want to select.

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action System ID System description

_ **NEW**

_ SMF1 SAMPLE SYSTEM DOMAIN 1

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

.-------------------------------------------------.

| The loading of data for system SMF1 is complete |

’-------------------------------------------------’

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 81. Confirmation of successful load of STATMON data

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 115

7. Press F3 to complete the process.

Modifying resource data for domain 1

When you complete the procedure in “Loading the resource data for domain 1” on

page 112, you have defined the network resources, the resource types, and the

place of the resources in the network hierarchy. However, this information only

forms the skeleton of your network. Now you must modify the default data to

reflect the policy decisions listed in “Administration tasks for the sample data” on

page 110. The information you must define includes:

v Service-level agreement values

v User-defined groups for resources

v Synonym names to be used in the reports

To make these modifications, use the Search1, Search2, and Change function keys

and the procedure to change individual resource entries.

Changing the NCP resource data

In this example, you must define a communication controller that runs NCPs with

different names, depending on the development cycle (see the table following

“Administration tasks for the sample data” on page 110). However, you cannot

define resources to Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS that are owned by more than

one NCP resource, and you cannot define three unique NCP resources that own

the same subordinate resources. You must also collect and report on the data under

a common name, regardless of which NCP was active at the time.

To solve this problem, define a synonym name of NCPUCX for each NCP resource

that can run in the communication controller. The feature uses this synonym as an

alias for the three possible NCP names. This synonym name represents the

communication controller in the database. Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS uses

the name in the reports, so you can report on the NCPs under the same name and

keep continuity in the reports.

When you loaded the STATMON data into , the sets the synonym name to the

resource name. For example, the synonym name for resource UCX4 is UCX4.

In this section, you will:

v Select all the resources in the NCP using the Search1 key.

v Change the synonym name of the NCP resource entry to NCPUCX.

v Change the NCP owner for all resources in the NCP to NCPUCX by using the

Change key.

v Add resource entries for the remaining two possible NCP names.

To perform these actions, follow these steps:

1. From the Network Administration Primary Option window, type 2 and press

Enter.

The Change Resource Data window (Figure 82) appears.

116 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

2. To search for all resources owned by the current NCP (UCX4), press F4.

The Set Search1 Values window (Figure 83 on page 117) appears.

3. Type the information shown in Figure 83 to search for all resources associated

with NCP UCX4.

4. Press Enter.

The Change Resource Data window reappears and displays the NCP

definition, the default group definition created by the dialog, and the names

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 690

Currently used search argument: SEARCH2 use PF5 to alter.

GROUP EQ *

--> NAME EQ * TYPE EQ * SYSID EQ * STATUS EQ *

Type one or more action codes to do the following:

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action Name Type System id Status

_ **NEW** * * D

_ AAUTCNMI APPL SMF1 O

_ APPCBRDG APPL SMF1 O

_ ATSO APPL SMF1 D

_ ATSO0001 APPL SMF1 D

_ ATSO0002 APPL SMF1 D

_ BNJHWMON APPL SMF1 O

_ DAS00001 APPL SMF1 O

_ DAS00002 APPL SMF1 O

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 82. Initial Change Resource Data window

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 690

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Set Search1 Values |

| |

| Enter a search pattern for one of the fields below. Use Search2 instead to |

| search on resource name and type, system ID, and status. |

| |

| Search pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . UCX4 |

| |

| Field to search for . . . . . . . . . 5 1. ACB name |

| 2. Group |

| 3. Alternate group |

| 4. Line |

| 5. NCP |

| 6. Synonym |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ ACQTF6MG APPL SMF1 N

_ ADOWO APPL SMF1 N

_ APPCBRDG APPL SMF1 O

_ ATSO APPL SMF1 D

_ ATSO0001 APPL SMF1 D

_ ATSO0002 APPL SMF1 D

_ BNJHWMON APPL SMF1 O

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 83. Search for all resources with NCP = UCX4

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 117

of the lines and clusters attached to the NCP. Figure 84 shows an extract of the

selection list.

5. To change the synonym name of the NCP entry for UCX4 to NCPUCX, type 1

next to the UCX4 resource in the selection list.

The Change NCP Resource Data window (see Figure 85) appears.

6. Type NCPUCX in the Synonym name field, and press Enter.

This message appears:

Change the NCP name of the resources attached to this NCP to NCPUCX.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 690

Currently used search argument: SEARCH1 use PF4 to alter.

--> NCP EQ UCX4

NAME EQ * TYPE EQ * SYSID EQ * STATUS EQ *

Type one or more action codes to do the following:

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action Name Type System id Status

_ UCX4 NCP SMF1 N

_ UCX4G GROUP SMF1 N

_ UC0Y6JF7 LINE SMF1 N

_ UDESOPJ3 CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ UO8HC2R0 LINE SMF1 N

_ UO8IE7 CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ UO9HM6 LINE SMF1 N

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 84. Selection list of resources attached to NCP UCX4

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 690

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change NCP Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes for this NCP resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . UCX4 Resource type . . . . . : NCP |

| System identifier . . . : * Synonym name . . . . . . . UCX4 |

| Group name . . . . . . . . NCPGRP Alternate group name . . . NONE |

| |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Resource description . . . NCP MAJOR NODE |

| |

| Availability process Availability reports Resource status |

| 1 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ DAS00001 APPL SMF1 O

_ DAS00002 APPL SMF1 O

_ UPQH1 CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ UQGIUVIW LINE SMF1 N

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 85. Change NCP Resource Data window

118 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

The Change Resource Data window reappears.

When the loads data from STATMON, the feature sets the synonym name for

NCP resources to the resource name. For the lines and clusters attached to

that NCP, the feature uses the default NCP synonym name as the name of the

owning NCP, so it uses the synonym name when verifying links between the

NCP and the attached lines and clusters (see �1� in Figure 86).

When you change the NCP synonym name, you break the links in the

network hierarchy, because Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS can no longer

find a resource that uses the name listed for the owning NCP (see �2� in

Figure 86).

To correct this problem, you must change the owning NCP name for all the

attached resources to match the new synonym name (see �3� in Figure 86).

7. Press F6 (Change).

Because the selection list already contains all the resources associated with

NCP UCX4, you can press F6 (Change) to change the owning resource name.

The Set Global Change Values window (Figure 87 on page 120) appears.

Synonym

Synonym

Synonym

UCX4UC0Y6JF7UDESOPJ3U08HC2R0U09HM6

UCX4UC0Y6JF7UDESOPJ3U08HC2R0U09HM6

UCX4UC0Y6JF7UDESOPJ3U08HC2R0U09HM6

NCPLINECLUSTERLINECLUSTER

NCPLINECLUSTERLINECLUSTER

NCPLINECLUSTERLINECLUSTER

UCX4UCX4UCX4UCX4UCX4

UCX4NCPUCXNCPUCXNCPUCXNCPUCX

UCX4UCX4UCX4UCX4UCX4

????

UCX4

NCPUCX

NCPUCX

Resource

Resource

Resource

Type

Type

Type

Work table

Work table

Work table

NCP

NCP

NCP

1

3

2

Figure 86. Hierarchical links between NCP, lines, and clusters

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 119

8. Type the information displayed in Figure 87, and press Enter.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS changes the entries and displays a message

indicating how many resources are changed. Because the current search

argument is still NCP = UCX4, the selection list is now empty.

You have now defined all the resources previously attached to NCP UCX4 to

be attached to NCP NCPUCX, and you have defined NCP resource UCX4 to

have a synonym name of NCPUCX. To finish changing all NCP synonym

names, you must add resource entries for the other possible NCP names,

UCX2 and UCX6, and set the synonym names of both entries to NCPUCX.

9. Press F4.

The Set Search1 Values window (Figure 83 on page 117) appears.

10. Type * in the Search pattern field and press Enter.

The Change Resource Data window reappears and displays all resources.

11. Move the cursor to the **NEW** entry, type 1, and press Enter.

The Specify a New Resource window (Figure 88) appears.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 690

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Set Global Change Values |

| |

| Type the new value and the code for the field to be changed. Only |

| currently selected resources will be changed. |

| |

| Change data to . . . . . . NCPUCX__ |

| |

| Field to be changed . . . 4 1. Group |

| 2. Alternate group |

| 3. Line |

| 4. NCP |

| 5. Synonym |

| 6. System ID |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ DAS00001 APPL SMF1 O

_ DAS00002 APPL SMF1 O

_ UPQH1 CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ UQGIUVIW LINE SMF1 N

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 87. Changing NCP fields to NCPUCX

120 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

12. Type the data displayed in Figure 88, and press Enter.

The Change NCP Resource Data window (Figure 89) appears.

13. Type the data displayed in Figure 89, and press Enter.

Because the synonym name and the resource name are different, this message

appears:

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 690

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Specify a New Resource |

| |

| Enter the name and type of the new resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . UCX2 Resource type . 7_ 1. Application |

| 2. Cluster |

| 3. Cross connection |

| 4. Group |

| 5. Line |

| 6. Local |

| 7. NCP |

| 8. Switched |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ ACQTF6MG APPL SMF1 N

_ ADOWO APPL SMF1 N

_ APPCBRDG APPL SMF1 O

_ ATSO APPL SMF1 D

_ ATSO0001 APPL SMF1 D

_ DAS00001 APPL SMF1 O

_ DAS00002 APPL SMF1 O

_ UPQH1 CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ UQGIUVIW LINE SMF1 N

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 88. Adding a new NCP entry

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 690

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change NCP Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes for this NCP resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . UCX2 Resource type . . . . . : NCP |

| System identifier . . . : * Synonym name . . . . . . . NCPUCX |

| Group name . . . . . . . . NCPGRP Alternate group name . . . NONE |

| |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Resource description . . . NCP MAJOR NODE |

| |

| Availability process Availability reports Resource status |

| 1 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 89. UCX2 resource entry

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 121

Change the NCP name of the resources attached to this NCP to NCPUCX.

You can ignore the message because you have already made this change in

step 8.

The Change Resource Data window reappears and indicates that the number

of rows in the selection list has increased by one.

14. Repeat steps 11 through 13 to add another entry for NCP UCX6.

You have now defined three NCP resources with synonym names of

NCPUCX. You must define a resource entry for NCPUCX because it does not

exist in the table.

15. Repeat steps 11 through 13 to add an NCP resource entry with the name

NCPUCX.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS uses the resource details for the NCPUCX

entry when creating reports for any of the three NCP names. This entry

completes the circle of pointers, as shown in Figure 90.

16. To check these entries, press F4 (Search1) from the Change Resource Data

window.

17. In the Set Search1 Values window, type NCPUCX for the search pattern and 6

(synonym) for the field to search for.

You have now correctly defined the hierarchy of the resources in the NCP.

However, the group name for these resources is still the default name assigned

when you loaded the data into Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS. The group name

for the UCX4 NCP is NCPGRP.

Changing application resources environment data

In this example, you must define the TSO and TSO user applications to Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS. The TSO applications are named ATSO and ATSO0001

to ATSO0005, and are minor nodes of the application major node ATSOMAJ. You

must also create a synonym name of PRODTSO for all the TSO applications so the

TSO reports will use a common name.

In this section, you will perform these actions:

v Select all application resources in an application major node.

v Specify the ACB names for application resources.

v Report data from TSO applications under a single name

To perform these actions, follow these steps:

1. From the Change Resource Data window, press F4 (Search1).

The Set Search1 Values window appears (Figure 83 on page 117).

2. Type ATSOMAJ for the search pattern and 2 (group) for the search field.

Synonym

NCPUCX

NCPUCX

NCPUCX

NCPUCX NCPUCX

NCPUCX

ResourceResource

UCX2

UCX4

UCX6

Figure 90. Resource and synonym pointers

122 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

The Change Resource Data window reappears and displays the resources in the

ATSOMAJ group. By default, all minor nodes belonging to the ATSOMAJ major

node are grouped under the major node name. See Figure 91.

After the dialog displays the resources in the ATSOMAJ group, change the ACB

names for each of the application resources (APPL) to the names defined in

VTAMLST. See Appendix A, “Sample STATMON Inputs and Outputs,” on page

167 for these definitions.

3. To edit the first listed APPL resource, ATSO, type 1 in the Action field beside

the ATSO entry, and press Enter.

The Change Application Resource Data window (see Figure 92 on page 124)

appears.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 693

Currently used search argument: SEARCH1 use PF4 to alter.

--> GROUP EQ ATSOMAJ

NAME EQ * TYPE EQ * SYSID EQ * STATUS EQ *

Type one or more action codes to do the following:

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action Name Type System ID Status

_ ATSO APPL SMF1 N

_ ATSOMAJ GROUP SMF1 N

_ ATSO0001 APPL SMF1 N

_ ATSO0002 APPL SMF1 N

_ ATSO0003 APPL SMF1 N

_ ATSO0004 APPL SMF1 N

_ ATSO0005 APPL SMF1 N

************************ BOTTOM OF DATA *************************************

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 91. Selection list of all resources in group ATSOMAJ

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 123

4. Type TSO in the ACB name field, and press Enter.

The dialog changes the ACB name, and the Change Resource Data window

reappears.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change the remaining APPL resources using the

selection list.

Use the ACB name from VTAMLST.

After you have changed all the ACB names, define the synonym name so that

all the TSO resources are reported under a single name.

Note: Be careful when you define synonym names for resources that also have

an ACB name. Setting the synonym name and the ACB name to the

same value will cause problems when you update the database tables.

6. Press F6 (Change).

The Set Global Change Values window appears (see Figure 87 on page 120).

7. Type PRODTSO in the Change data to field, type 5 (synonym) in the Field to

be changed field, and press Enter.

The Change Resource Data window reappears and displays a message noting

that seven resources were changed.

8. Type 1 beside the ATSO entry, and press Enter.

The Change Application Resource Data window (Figure 92) reappears,

displaying the data for the ATSO application.

Note that the change function has not only changed the synonym name to

PRODTSO but also changed the multiple-task indicator from no to yes. This

indicator was changed because application resources that are reported under a

single name (the synonym name) must also be defined as multiple task. A

multiple-task indicator of yes specifies that the application will be reported

with other applications. A multiple-task indicator of no specifies that the

application is unique and is reported individually. See Figure 51 on page 82 for

more information on multiple-task applications.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 693

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change Application Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes to this application resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . ATSO Resource type . . . . . : APPL |

| System identifier . . . . SMF1 Synonym name . . . . . . . ATSO |

| Group name . . . . . . . . ATSOMAJ Alternate group name . . . NONE |

| ACB name . . . . . . . . . ________ |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Transit time in % . . . . 95 |

| Resource description . . . APPLICATION |

| |

| Multiple Availability Availability Resource |

| task process reports status |

| 2 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. No 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 92. Application resource entry

124 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

This condition does not apply to the main TSO application, so you must

change the multiple-task entry.

9. Move the cursor to the multiple task field, type 2 (no), and press Enter.

The information is changed and the Change Resource Data window reappears.

You can use this procedure to define other multiple-task applications to Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS. For example, JES328X applications are normally

reported under a single name rather than by each application. For applications

such as IMS and CICS, you need not change the multiple-task indicator.

Changing resource data to group lines and clusters

In this example, you must report on lines and clusters by geographic location. In

particular, you want to specify that line V40LKNF8 and the attached clusters are in

London in zone 1, and that these resources will be reported using the group name

LONDON1.

In this section, you will:

v Select a line and all attached clusters

v Connect resources to a different group

v Define a new group

To perform these actions, follow these steps:

1. From the Change Resource Data window (Figure 91 on page 123), press F4

(Search1).

The Set Search1 Values window (Figure 83 on page 117) appears.

2. To select line V40LKNF8 and all attached clusters, type V40LKNF8 in the

Search pattern field, type 4 (line) in the Field to search for field, and press

Enter.

The Change Resource Data window (Figure 93) reappears, displaying the

names of resources attached to the specified line.

3. To specify a group name of LONDON1 for these resources, press F6 (Change).

The Set Global Change Values window (Figure 94 on page 126) appears.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 693

Currently used search argument: SEARCH1 use PF4 to alter.

--> LINE EQ V40LKNF8

NAME EQ * TYPE EQ * SYSID EQ * STATUS EQ *

Type one or more action codes to do the following:

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action Name Type System ID Status

_ V40LKNF8 LINE SMF1 N

_ V42FFTC6 CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ WW1LT CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ WYINN CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ WZE2KEU CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ WZ5VYHZ CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ W08720 CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ W2QF7 CLUSTER SMF1 N

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 93. Selection list of all resources where line = V40LKNF8

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 125

4. Type the information displayed in Figure 94, and press Enter.

The Change Resource Data window reappears and a message is displayed

indicating the number of changed resources.

The resources are now assigned to the group LONDON1, but you have not yet

defined this group.

To define this group, you must add a new group resource named LONDON1.

However, the **NEW** entry, which is required to add a new resource, does not

appear in the selection list. To display the **NEW** entry, you must display all

resources of some type (the type you specify does not matter).

5. To display all resources and the **NEW** entry, press F4.

The Set Search1 Values window (Figure 83 on page 117) appears.

6. Type * in the Search pattern field, type 2 in the Field to search for field, and

press Enter.

The Change Resource Data window reappears and displays all resources.

7. Move the cursor to the **NEW** entry, type 1, and press Enter.

The Specify a New Resource window (Figure 95 on page 127) appears.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 693

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Set Global Change Values |

| |

| Type the new value and the code for the field to be changed. Only |

| currently selected resources will be changed. |

| |

| Change data to . . . . . . LONDON1_ |

| |

| Field to be changed . . . 1 1. Group |

| 2. Alternate group |

| 3. Line |

| 4. NCP |

| 5. Synonym |

| 6. System ID |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ V40LKNF8 LINE SMF1 N

_ V42FFTC6 CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ WW1LT CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ WYINN CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ WZE2KEU CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ WZ5VYHZ CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ W08720 CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ W2QF7 CLUSTER SMF1 N

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 94. Connecting resources to group LONDON1

126 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

8. Type the data displayed in Figure 95, and press Enter.

The Change Group Resource Data window (Figure 96) appears.

9. Type the information displayed in Figure 96 on page 127, and press Enter.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 693

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Specify a New Resource |

| |

| Enter the name and type of the new resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . LONDON1 Resource type . 4 1. Application |

| 2. Cluster |

| 3. Cross connection |

| 4. Group |

| 5. Line |

| 6. Local |

| 7. NCP |

| 8. Switched |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ V40LKNF8 LINE SMF1 N

_ V42FFTC6 CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ WW1LT CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ WYINN CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ WZE2KEU CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ WZ5VYHZ CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ W08720 CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ W2QF7 CLUSTER SMF1 N

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 95. Adding a new group entry

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 693

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change Group Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes to this group resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . LONDON1 Resource type . . . . . : GROUP |

| System identifier . . . : * |

| |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Transit time in % . . . . 95 |

| Resource description . . . London Zone 1 |

| |

| Availability process Availability reports Resource status |

| 1 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ W08720 CLUSTER SMF1 N

_ W2QF7 CLUSTER SMF1 N

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 96. Defining the geographic group entry

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 127

The feature creates the new group and the Change Resource Data window

reappears.

Changing the cross-connection resource environment data

In this example, you must identify the cross-connection between the two domains

in the network and report on the connection using the synonym name

CDRMR1R2.

In this section, you will:

v Select all cross-connection resources using the Search2 key.

v Change the synonym name of the cross-connection to CDRMR1R2.

To perform these actions, follow these steps:

1. From the Change Resource Data window (Figure 91 on page 123), press F5

(Search2).

The Set Search2 Values window (Figure 97) appears.

2. Type the information displayed in Figure 97, and press Enter.

The Change Resource Data window (Figure 98 on page 129) reappears,

displaying the cross-connection resources. Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

defines one entry for each cross-connection when it loads data from STATMON.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 694

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Set Search2 Values |

| |

| Set the search patterns and the search conditions that you want. You can |

| press F6 (Cycle) to step through the valid resource types. |

| |

| Resource name . . * Resource type . . CONN |

| System ID . . . . * Status . . . . . . * |

| |

| Resource name Resource type System ID |

| condition condition condition Status condition |

| 1 1. EQ 1 1. EQ 1 1. EQ 1 1. EQ |

| 2. NE 2. NE 2. NE 2. NE |

| 3. GT 3. GT 3. GT 3. GT |

| 4. GE 4. GE 4. GE 4. GE |

| 5. LT 5. LT 5. LT 5. LT |

| 6. LE 6. LE 6. LE 6. LE |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F6=Cycle F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ AD77F APPL SMF1 N

_ AD8CBBOE APPL SMF1 N

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 97. Search for all cross-connection resources

128 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

The default synonym name for cross-connection resources consists of the last 4

characters of the names of the cross-domain resource managers in each host

system.

3. To check the synonym name, type 1 in the Action field next to the resource

name, and press Enter.

The Change Cross-connection Resource Data window (Figure 99 on page 130)

appears.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 694

Currently used search argument: SEARCH2 use PF5 to alter.

LINE EQ *

--> NAME EQ * TYPE EQ CONN SYSID EQ * STATUS EQ *

Type one or more action codes to do the following:

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action Name Type System id Status

_ CDR2 CONN SMF1 N

_ DOYCQTCH CONN SMF1 N

_ DO7CRL CONN SMF1 N

_ DPEV CONN SMF1 N

_ DPNFAC CONN SMF1 N

_ DPQ1ZQ7 CONN SMF1 N

_ DQMQ CONN SMF1 N

_ DQVY00 CONN SMF1 N

_ DRE2ER CONN SMF1 N

_ DRWZB CONN SMF1 N

_ DSAI8K4Q CONN SMF1 N

_ DSQNX CONN SMF1 N

****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA ******************************

COMMAND ===> _________________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 98. List of cross-connection resources

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 129

4. Type CDRMR1R2 in the Synonym name field and press Enter.

The Change Cross-connection Resource Data window (Figure 100) remains on

the screen, with a message notifying you that you are not using the

recommended synonym name.

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 694

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change Cross-connection Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes to this cross-connection resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . CDR2 Resource type . . . . . : CONN |

| System identifier . . . . SMF1 Synonym name . . . . . . . CDR1CDR2 |

| Group name . . . . . . . . CDRMGRP Alternate group name . . . NONE |

| Own CDRM name . . . . . . CDR1 |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Resource description . . . CDRM |

| |

| Availability process Availability reports Resource status |

| 1 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F11=Defaults F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

_ AD77F APPL SMF1 N

_ AD8CBBOE APPL SMF1 N

_ AD8CBBOF APPL SMF1 N

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 99. Cross-connection resource entry for CDR2

Change Resource Data ROW 1 FROM 694

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Change Cross-connection Resource Data |

| |

| Enter the changes to this cross-connection resource. |

| |

| Resource name . . . . . . CDR2 Resource type . . . . . : CONN |

| System identifier . . . . SMF1 Synonym name . . . . . . . CDRMR1R2 |

| Group name . . . . . . . . CDRMGRP Alternate group name . . . NONE |

| Own CDRM name . . . . . . CDR1 |

| Availability in % . . . . 95 Stability . . . . . . . . 1 |

| Resource description . . . CDRM |

| |

| Availability process Availability reports Resource status |

| 1 1. Yes 1 1. Yes 1 1. New |

| 2. No 2. No 2. Old |

| 3. Missing |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F11=Defaults F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------

| The suggested value for field synonym is "CDR1CDR2" |

-------------------------------------------------------

COMMAND ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Search1 F5=Search2 F6=Change

F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 100. Changed cross-connection resource entry for CDR2

130 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

5. Press Enter to verify that you want to change the synonym name. To change

the synonym name back to the default value, press F11 (Defaults).

The synonym name is changed and the Change Resource Data window

reappears.

6. You have completed the resource changes for domain 1. Press F3 (Exit) to

return to the Primary Option window.

Updating the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database

You have completed defining the network environment for domain 1 to Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS. The environment data is held in the ISPF work table

until you update the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database table.

Because you also must modify the STATMON data for domain 2, you could use

option 4, Add STATMON data to the work table, on the Load Options window to

load the domain 2 data and continue working. However, for this example, update

the database with the domain 1 data before you load and modify the domain 2

data. This method is preferred, because it keeps the work table small and improves

the performance of the dialog. You update the database by:

v Verifying the data in the work table

v Creating database update commands

v Processing the update commands

To perform these actions, follow these steps:

1. From the Network Administration Primary Option window, type 3 and press

Enter to select the Verify the work table option.

The Confirm Selection window (Figure 101) appears.

2. Press Enter to verify the entries in the work table. Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS checks that the entries in the work table meet these criteria:

Network Administration: Primary Option

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Confirm Selection |

| |

| Press Enter to continue. Press Cancel (F12) to quit. |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

----------------------------------

| Process Verify Resource Tables |

----------------------------------

Command ===> ___________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 101. Confirming the verification of the work table

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 131

v Each cluster entry must be attached to a valid line entry.

v Each cluster entry must be attached to a valid NCP entry.

v Each line entry must be attached to a valid NCP entry.

v Each resource entry must be connected to a valid group entry.The verification process may take several minutes, depending on the number of

resource entries in the work table.

3. If Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS finds errors during verification, it writes

the errors to your ISPF log and sends a message noting the number of errors

found.

To check the errors in the ISPF log, type LOG on the ISPF command line.

Specify that you want to keep the existing log and to start a new one by typing

KN in the Disposition of log data set field. Note the name of the log data set

specified and edit that data set using ISPF edit. Correct the errors listed in the

log data set and verify the table again until there are no errors.

When the verification process does not find errors, the Network Administration

Primary Option window reappears.

4. To create database update commands, type 4 on the Network Administration

Primary Option window and press Enter.

The Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Database Update window (Figure 102)

appears.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS uses the entries in the work table to update

the database, but it selects only entries with a system ID that matches the

system ID you select on this window and resources with a system ID of *

(NCPs and groups). If you have resources from more than one domain defined

in your network, you must update the database separately for each domain.

5. Type 1 beside the entry for the SMF1 system, and press Enter.

Tivoli Decision Support for OS/390 Database Update ROW 1 TO 1 OF 1

Select the system that you want to update the database with.

1 - Select

S System ID System description

_ SMF1 SAMPLE SYSTEM DOMAIN 1

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ******************************

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 102. Selecting the system for database update

132 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

The Process Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Statements window (Figure 103)

appears.

6. Type 1 in the Type of statements field and press F5 (Execute).

7. processes the database update commands and displays messages indicating

whether the update process was successful.

8. Press F3 (Exit) to return to the Process Statements window. Press F12 (Cancel)

to return to the Network Administration Primary Option window.

Updating the network environment for domain 2

After loading and modifying the environment data for domain 1, use the same

process to load and modify the environment data for domain 2.

The STATMON output for domain 2 has been written to this data set:

DRL160.SDRLDEFS(DRLSTAT2)

It is shipped with the . It can be used for testing. You define this data set to the

dialog using the Set Defaults and Load Data window (Figure 104 on page 134).

To load the environment data for domain 2, follow these steps:

1. From the Network Administration Primary Option window (Figure 77 on page

112), type 2 and press Enter to specify the resource defaults for domain 2.

The Set Defaults and Load Data window (Figure 104) appears.

Tivoli Decision Support for OS/390 Database Update ROW 1 TO 1 OF 1

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Process Tivoli Decision Support for OS/390 Statements |

| |

| Type in the data set name. Then press Enter to edit the |

| statements. |

| |

| |

| Input data set name userid.EPDMDEFS |

| |

| Type of statements __ 1. Log collector |

| 2. Report definition |

| |

| Show input |

| statements . . . . 2 1. Yes |

| 2. No |

| |

| Trace SQL calls . . 2 1. Yes |

| 2. No |

| |

| |

------------------------------ |

| 693 records were processed | ----------------------------------------------

------------------------------ __________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F5=Execute F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 103. Processing database update statements

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 133

2. Type 1 beside the **NEW** entry, and press Enter.

The Edit Resource Defaults window (Figure 105) appears.

3. Type the information displayed in Figure 105 on page 134 and press Enter.

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

Type an action code beside the system ID you want to select.

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action System ID System description

_ **NEW**

_ SMF1 SAMPLE SYSTEM DOMAIN 1

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ******************************

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 104. List of defined systems

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Edit Resource Defaults |

| |

| Enter the defaults that apply to the resource data that you are loading. |

| |

| System identifier . . . . SMF2 CDRM name . . . . CDR2____ |

| System description . . . Sample system domain 2___ |

| STATMON data set . . . . DRL151.SDRLDEFS(DRLSTAT2)___________________ |

| Output data set name . . userid.EPDMDEFS_____________________________ |

| |

| Application availability 95 Stability . . 1 |

| Cluster availability . . 95 Stability . . 1 |

| Connection availability . 95 Stability . . 1 |

| Transit time objective . 95 |

| |

| |

| |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 105. Resource default values for a new system

134 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Note: You must copy the DSINDEF member to another member before you use

the STATMON data. The STATMON loader changes the contents of the

member containing the STATMON data.

The Load Options window (see Figure 106) appears.

Because you have already updated the database with data for domain 1, you

can load the domain 2 data directly into the work table.

4. Type 1 and press Enter.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS loads the data and displays a message

indicating that the loading was successful. The entry for system SMF2 appears

on the Set Defaults and Load Data window, indicating that the dialog loaded

the data correctly (Figure 107).

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Load Options |

| |

| Select the way the resource data is loaded: |

| |

| 1 1. Load STATMON data. |

| 2. Load database table. |

| 3. Merge STATMON data and database table. |

| 4. Add STATMON data to the work table. |

| |

| Use the choices as follows: |

| |

| 1. Use this to build a new resource table. |

| 2. Use this to make minor changes to your resource table. |

| 3. Use this to update your resource table with new STATMON data. |

| 4. Use this to combine STATMON data from multiple systems. |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

------------------------

| Process system SMF2. |

------------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 106. Load Options window

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 135

5. Press F3 (Exit) to return to the Network Administration Primary Option

window.

Changing domain 2 environment data and updating the

database

After you load the environment data for domain 2, you can change the data, using

the same procedures described in “Modifying resource data for domain 1” on page

116. When you complete the changes, verify the data and update the Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS database, using the procedures listed in “Updating the

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database” on page 131. Because you now have

data for two domains, you must update the database separately for each domain.

Defining complex network environments

The sample network used in the administration example has a simple

configuration. Figure 108 on page 137 shows a network with a more complex

network configuration.

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

Type an action code next to the system ID for the data that you are

loading.

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action System ID System description

_ **NEW**

_ SMF1 SAMPLE SYSTEM DOMAIN 1

_ SMF2 SAMPLE SYSTEM DOMAIN 2

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ******************************

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 107. Confirmation of successful load of STATMON data

136 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

This network consists of two domains, with the two host systems sharing a single

NCP. Because of this arrangement, you must follow certain rules in defining the

NCP and the attached resources. You define all other resources using the same

procedures given in “Modifying resource data for domain 1” on page 116.

In this example, the NCP major node definition is the same in both domains. Each

domain owns some of the resources attached to the NCP, and the remaining

resources are shared between the two domains and therefore have no ownership

defined. When you run the STATMON preprocessor for each domain using the

current VTAMLST, STATMON generates an entry for each resource defined in the

NCP. Because STATMON ignores any OWNER parameters defined in VTAMLST,

the order that you load the STATMON data into Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

defines which system identifier is the owner of the resources.

Because of this, Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS ignores the STATMON data for

the NCP resources in the second domain. Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS sets the

resource owner to the first domain (since that data was loaded first), and the NCP

major-node definitions in the second domain are the same as the definitions in the

first domain. Figure 109 on page 138 shows the definitions in the dialog work table

after Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS loads the STATMON data, first for system

SMF1, and then for system SMF2.

NCPA

HostSMF1

HostSMF2

PU

PU

PU

PU X

PU Y

PU Z

OwnerSMF1

OwnerSMF2

LU

LU

LU

Figure 108. Example of a complex network configuration

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 137

The ownership of resource Z is set to SMF1 instead of the SMF2 ownership

defined in VTAMLST. Although this information does not match the actual

network configuration, it does not create a problem in the . Tivoli Decision Support

for z/OS uses only the resource name during collect and reporting, and uses the

system identifier only during administration.

When you load STATMON data for networks that share an NCP, load the data first

for the host system to be defined as the owner of resources attached to the NCP. If

your installation uses NPM to record data, first load the STATMON data for the

host system where NPM is located. Figure 110 on page 139 shows an example of

this configuration.

Figure 109. Definitions in work table for complex network

138 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

In this example, the resources are defined with the system identifier SMF1, which

matches the system identifier that NPM uses to log the data to SMF.

Deleting the sample data

After you finish loading and modifying the sample data, you can load and modify

data from your own network. To reduce the size of the NW_RESOURCE table and

improve performance, delete the sample data from the Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS database.

To delete the data, follow these steps:

1. From the Network Administration Primary Option window (Figure 77 on page

112), type 2 and press Enter.

The Change Resource Data window appears.

2. Press F5.

The Set Search2 Values window appears.

3. Type SMF1 in the System ID field, type 1 in the System ID condition field and

press Enter.

The dialog displays all the resources associated with system SMF1.

4. Type deleteall on the command line to delete all the selected resources.

5. Press F3 to return to the Network Administration Primary Option window.

6. From the Network Administration Primary Option window, type 4 and press

Enter.

The Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Database Update window appears.

7. Select system SMF1 and press Enter.

The Process Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Statements window appears.

8. Type 1 in the Type of statements field and press Enter.

Because you deleted all the entries in the work table, updating the database

deletes the entries in the NW_RESOURCE table for system SMF1.

Figure 110. Example of a complex network using NPM

Chapter 6. Administration Dialog Example 139

9. (If you have added data of your own into the NW_RESOURCE table, skip this

step.) For SMF1, add this statement first in the displayed output:

SQL DELETE FROM xxx.NW_RESOURCE WHERE MVS_SYSTEM_ID = ’*’;

where xxx is your DB2 prefix.

This statement deletes the common resources such as groups and NCPs.

10. Repeat the process to delete the entries for system SMF2.

11. When you have deleted the resource data for both domains, type 1 from the

Network Administration Primary Option window and press Enter.

The Set Defaults and Load Data window appears.

12. Type 2 beside the entries for SMF1 and SMF2 and press Enter. See Figure 111.

The Confirm Selection window (Figure 101 on page 131) appears.

13. Press Enter to delete the sample data.

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

Type an action code next to the system ID for the data that you are

loading.

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action System ID System description

_ **NEW**

2 SMF1 SAMPLE SYSTEM DOMAIN 1

2 SMF2 SAMPLE SYSTEM DOMAIN 2

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ******************************

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 111. Deleting the sample data

140 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Chapter 7. Customizing NetView and NPM

This chapter contains information on the tasks you must perform to customize

NetView and NPM to work with the Network Performance feature.

After you install the required Network Performance feature components and define

the resource and environment information, customize NetView and NPM to

produce the data the components use. Perform only the customization tasks

required for the installed components.

The table below “Determining NetView customization tasks” on page 141

summarizes the tasks you must perform for NetView, and the table below

“Determining NPM customization tasks” on page 145 summarizes the tasks you

must perform for NPM. These tables show what tasks are needed for each

function, and the functions are grouped under their information categories.

Each task has a corresponding task code. The task code numbers have been

assigned arbitrarily, and do not show in what order you should perform the tasks.

To determine the order in which to perform these tasks, refer to the NetView

Installation and Administration Guide and the NetView Performance Monitor Installation

and Customization.

To determine the customization tasks that you must perform:

1. Select the columns corresponding to the functions you installed in the table

below “Determining NetView customization tasks” on page 141 and the table

below “Determining NPM customization tasks” on page 145.

2. Make a list of task codes in the rows marked with X for these selected columns.

3. Use this task code list to look up the tasks to perform in “Customizing

NetView” and “Customizing NPM” on page 145.

Customizing NetView and Customizing NPM give only an overview of what you

must do. For details of the commands and parameter definitions, refer to the

NetView Installation and Administration Guide for the tasks relating to NetView, and

to the NetView Performance Monitor Installation and Customization for the tasks

relating to NPM.

Customizing NetView

This section lists the customization tasks to perform for NetView. These tasks are

shown in the table below “Determining NetView customization tasks” on page 141

in numeric order.

Determining NetView customization tasks

Use the following table as a checklist to ensure that NetView is customized the

way the installed Network Performance feature components expect.

Availability

Response

Time Utilization Problem

Service

Level

Config-

uration

File

Transfer

Task

Code SNA RTM NV/SM HW / SW

Session

Failure NAM

nv1 X X X X X

141

Availability

Response

Time Utilization Problem

Service

Level

Config-

uration

File

Transfer

Task

Code SNA RTM NV/SM HW / SW

Session

Failure NAM

nv2 X

nv3 X

nv4 X

nv5 X

nv6 X

nv7 X

nv8 X

nv9 X X

nv10 X

nv11 X

nv12 X

nv13 X

nv14 X

nv15 X

nv1—Define SMF logging in NetView

The NetView session monitor uses the standard NetView log task to log data to

SMF using type 39 SMF records.

For NetView V1R3:

1. To define the SMF logging task, add this statement to the DSIDMN data set:

TASK MOD=DSIZDST,TSKID=DSIELTSK,MEM=DSIELMEM,PRI=2,INIT=Y

2. To define the SMF logging task to NetView, add this statement to the NetView

command member, DSICMD:

DSIELDAT CMDMDL MOD=DSIELSMF,TYPE=D,RES=Y,PARSE=N

nv2—Collect NetView session awareness data

To collect session awareness data at session monitor initialization, add this

statement to the NetView session monitor initialization member, AAUPRMLP:

INITMOD AAUINLDM SAW=YES

nv3—Log NetView session awareness data to SMF

To log the session awareness data to SMF, add this statement to the NetView

session monitor initialization member, AAUPRMLP:

INITMOD AAUINLDM SESSTATS=YES

Refer to the NetView Installation and Administration Guide for a description of the

acceptable combinations of the SESSTATS and LOG parameters.

142 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

nv4—Reduce the CPU and storage utilization in the session

monitor

To reduce the CPU and storage utilization in the session monitor, collect session

awareness data only for the sessions in which you are interested. To specify the

sessions for which you want session awareness data collected, filter the collection

of session awareness data in VTAM rather than NetView.

nv5—Collect session statistics for active sessions

To record session statistics for all sessions to be included in the availability process,

issue this command:

NLDM RECORD SESSTATS resource1 resource2

Resource1 is the name of the SSCP in the VTAM host where NetView is running.

Resource2 can be any of these resources:

SSCP in another host Use this value to measure cross-connection

availability.

PU Use this value to measure cluster and NCP

availability.

Application LUs Use this value to measure application availability.

Issue this command at regular time intervals. You can use NetView CLISTs to issue

commands automatically. The recommended interval is 30 minutes.

nv6—Collect RTM data in NetView session monitor

To collect RTM data in NetView at session monitor initialization, add the

parameter RTM=YES to the AAUINLDM statement in the NetView session monitor

initialization member, AAUPRMLP. For example:

INITMOD AAUINLDM RTM=YES

nv7—Log NetView session monitor RTM data to SMF

To log the NetView session monitor RTM data to SMF, add the parameter

LOG=YES to the AAUINLDM statement in the NetView session monitor

initialization member, AAUPRMLP. For example:

INITMOD AAUINLDM LOG=YES

nv8—Collect RTM data and log to SMF

To collect and log the RTM data to SMF, issue this command:

NLDM COLLECT RTM * LOG

Issue this command at regular time intervals. You can use NetView CLISTs to issue

commands automatically. The recommended interval is 30 minutes.

nv9—Define RTM performance classes

The RTM objectives are defined in the performance classes. The Network

Performance feature also uses the objectives as the service-level agreements in the

Network Performance feature service reports. Define these performance classes for

each application:

v One class for local terminals

v One class for terminals attached to a local NCP

v One class for terminals attached to a remote NCP

Chapter 7. Customizing NetView and NPM 143

Use PCLASS to define the performance class definitions. Use MAPSESS to map LU

names to performance classes. Refer to the NetView Installation and Administration

Guide for more information on defining performance classes.

nv10—Customize cluster controllers for RTM

Customize the controllers to produce the RTM data. For details on this procedure,

refer to the manual for IBM controllers 3274, 3174, and 3708.

nv11—Collect session monitor utilization data

To collect the session monitor utilization data, issue this command:

NLDM RECORD STRGDATA

This command tells NetView to log information on the amount of storage used by

the session monitor. Issue this command at regular intervals. You can use NetView

CLISTs to issue commands automatically. The recommended interval is 30 minutes.

nv12—Start and stop hardware monitor logging

To start logging hardware monitor data to SMF, issue this command:

REPORTS ON

To stop logging hardware monitor data to SMF, issue this command:

REPORTS OFF

You can issue the REPORTS ON command automatically by adding it to member

BNJAPAMA, or use NetView CLISTs to issue both commands. For example, to

collect the hardware monitor data only during service hours, add these commands

to a NetView CLIST:

AT 7:00 PPT,NPDA REPORTS ON

AT 18:00 PPT,NPDA REPORTS OFF

nv13—Collect session failure data in NetView session monitor

To collect the session failure data, add the parameter LOG=YES to the AAUINLDM

statement in the NetView session monitor initialization member, AAUPRMLP. For

example:

INITMOD AAUINLDM LOG=YES

nv14—Activate the network asset management function

Refer to the NetView Installation and Administration Guide for detailed information

on activating the network asset management function.

nv15—Collect configuration data

Issue VPD commands for the devices for which you want to collect configuration

data. You can use NetView CLISTs to issue these commands automatically. Refer to

the NetView Installation and Administration Guide for more information on defining

these commands.

144 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Customizing NPM

This section lists the customization tasks to perform for NPM. These tasks are

shown in the table below “Determining NPM customization tasks” in the sequence

they should be performed. Use the table following “Determining NPM

customization tasks” as a checklist to ensure that NPM is customized the way the

installed Network Performance feature functions expect.

Refer to the NPM Installation and Customization and the NPM User’s Guide for

detailed information on NPM customization.

Determining NPM customization tasks

Use the information in the following table to determine the customization tasks

you must perform for NPM.

Response

Time Utilization

Task Code

NPM Transit

Time NCP Line PU NEO NTRI X.25 NPM LAN VTAM

SNMP

Routers

npm1 X X X X X X X X X X

npm2 X

npm3 X X X X X X X X X X X

npm4 X X X X X X X X X X

npm5 X X X X X X X X X

npm6 X

npm7 X X X X X X X

npm8 X X X X X X

npm9 X X X X X X

npm10 X X X X X X

npm11 X

npm12 X

npm13 X

npm14 X

npm15 X

npm16 X

npm17 X

npm18 X

npm19 X

npm20 X

npm21 X

npm22 X

npm23 X

npm24 X

npm25 X

Chapter 7. Customizing NetView and NPM 145

npm1—SMF logging

Ensure that data is written to SMF by verifying the CONTROL statement in the

NPM initialization member FNMINIT. The parameters you must check are:

CONTROL ....,SMF= ............,SID= .....

SMF

Set this parameter to YES. This parameter specifies that NPM allocates storage

in CSA for SMF data recording.

SID

This parameter specifies that the system ID, cccc, is to be added to the NPM

records written to the FNMLOGx data sets. This parameter is valid for NPM

running under VM.

Note: NPM can control which SMF record types are written or suppressed, not

just those written by NPM. Verify that the SMFCNTL does not contain

definitions that will suppress SMF record types used by the Network

Performance feature.

The SMFCNTL command defines options for processing SMF and RTM data.

Network Performance feature does not support RTM data written to SMF by NPM.

npm2—Log session interval records to SMF

Ensure that NPM will log session interval records to SMF by verifying the NPM

statement in the NPM initialization member FNMINIT. The parameter you must

check is:

NPM .....,SESSION= ............

SESSION

Set this parameter to SMF. This parameter specifies that NPM will log the

session interval records to SMF.

npm3—NPM collect interval

The value you select for the NPM collect interval affects both the accuracy of

utilization measurements and the performance of the Network Performance

feature.

When setting the collect interval, you must:

v Balance measurement accuracy against reduced data volume.

v Set the interval start time as close to the beginning of each hour as possible.

To understand how the collect interval affects measurement accuracy, examine the

situations presented in Figure 112 on page 147 and Figure 113 on page 147.

146 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Although the minimum, maximum, and average values are identical, the line in

Figure 113 has exceeded the threshold value more often than the line in Figure 112.

If you increase the number of collects, the minimum, maximum, and average

values will remain the same.

Maximum

ThresholdAverage

MinimumTime

onehour

Figure 112. Line utilization example A

Maximum

ThresholdAverage

Time

Minimum

onehour

Figure 113. Line utilization example B

Chapter 7. Customizing NetView and NPM 147

To provide a clearer picture of utilization, the Network Performance feature uses

two methods to measure utilization:

v Using a series of counters, each representing 10 percent utilization, that are

incremented during each interval. For example, if the feature measures 30

percent utilization, the 10%, 20%, and 30% counters are each incremented by

one.

v Measuring the percentage of intervals the utilization is above the threshold

value.

If you set the collect interval to once an hour and measure the percentage of

intervals above the threshold for Figure 112 on page 147 and Figure 113 on page

147, the log record indicates that utilization exceeded the threshold during the

interval in both examples. Because there is only one interval, the value for

percentage of intervals above the threshold is 100% in both examples.

If you set the collect interval to ten times an hour, the line in Figure 112 on page

147 has one interval during which utilization exceeded the threshold, so the value

is 10%. The line in Figure 113 on page 147 has three intervals during which

utilization exceeded the threshold, so the value is 30%.

Although the shorter collect interval produces more accurate utilization

measurements, the accuracy comes at the cost of having to write many more SMF

records. When deciding on the collect interval to use, you must balance these

factors.

Define the interval in “npm4—Define the base interval” on page 149.

When you have selected the collect interval, you must decide when each interval

starts. The interval starting time also affects measurement accuracy.

In the example in Figure 114 on page 149, the collect intervals for Collect A and

Collect B are both set to one hour, but the interval starting times are different.

In both cases, the interval t1 to t2 represents data for 11:00 to 12:00. However, most

of that interval in Collect A actually takes place during the time from 12:00 to

13:00, while the interval in Collect B closely matches the 11:00 to 12:00 period. If a

problem occurs at 12:15, Collect A stores the event as part of the t1 to t2 data,

indicating that the event happened between 11:00 and 12:00. Collect B stores the

event as part of the t2 to t3 data, indicating that the event happened between 12:00

and 13:00, which is correct.

Define the interval synchronization in “npm5—Define the interval

synchronization” on page 149.

148 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

npm4—Define the base interval

Verify that the network collection base interval is correct by checking the NPM

statement in the NPM initialization member FNMINIT. The parameter you must

check is:

NPM .....,INTERVAL= .......

INTERVAL

This parameter specifies the base interval. The default base interval is 225

seconds.

If you use the default base interval, an “even” NPM collection interval (2, 4, or

6) is recommended.

npm5—Define the interval synchronization

Verify that the collect interval starts as close as possible to the beginning of the

hour by checking the NPM statement in the NPM initialization member FNMINIT.

The parameter you must check is:

NPM .....,SYNCH= .......

SYNCH

This parameter synchronizes the network and session data collection with the

time-of-day (TOD) clock.

To synchronize on hourly intervals, use the default value SYNCH=(5,0).

npm6—Define the session collect interval

Verify that the session collection interval is correct by checking the NPM statement

in the NPM initialization member FNMINIT. The parameter you must check is:

NPM .....,SESSINT=..........

SESSINT

This parameter specifies the interval for logging session statistics. Its value is

multiplied by the base interval. The default is 1.

Collect At1

t1

t2

t2

t3

t3 t4

11 12 13 14

Collect B

Hour

Figure 114. Example of collect intervals

Chapter 7. Customizing NetView and NPM 149

npm7—Collect network data

Ensure that you have completed all the steps necessary to install the NPM network

data collection functions. Refer to the NPM Installation and Customization for

detailed information.

npm8—Define NCP to NPM

Verify that NPM has information about the network configuration (NCPs and their

resources) by checking the NCP statement in the NPM initialization member

FNMINIT (releases prior to NPM 1.5), or FNMSCMDS or FNMSTRT (NPM 1.5 and

later releases). The parameter you must check is:

NCP ....PUNAME=,..........

PUNAME

This parameter assigns a unique name to the CCU. The name assigned on this

parameter can change the way the Network Performance feature translates

NCP synonyms. For the Network Performance feature, you should either not

specify this parameter or set the PU name to be the same as the NCP synonym

name.

npm9—Collect network data

Ensure that network data is collected for resources supported by the installed

Network Performance feature functions by adding either the

v START COLLECT commands (when NPM version 1)

or

v NETCOLL commands (when NPM version 2)

to the NPM commands member FNMSTRT for those network resources whose

data you want to collect.

Refer to the NPM Installation and Customization for detailed information.

The START COLLECT command

In NPM 1.5 and later releases, the START COLLECT commands are not required to

be in FNMSTRT. The parameters you must check are:

START COLLECT ,interval number,...,LOG=.....,CLOCK=.....,DAILY=.....

interval number

This parameter specifies which of the eight collection intervals to use. You can

use different intervals for different resources. If you use the default base

interval value, an even interval (2, 4, or 6) is recommended.

LOG

You must set this parameter to SMF to specify that NPM will log the network

data records to SMF.

CLOCK and DAILY

Set these parameters to match the time and frequency of the collection period.

150 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

The NETCOLL command

The parameters you must check are:

NETCOLL ,INTERVAL=,...,DEST=.....,CLOCK=.....,DAILY=.....

INTERVAL

This parameter specifies which of the collection intervals (1 to 7) to use. You

can use different intervals for different resources. If you use the default base

interval value, an even interval (2, 4, or 6) is recommended.

DEST

You must set this parameter to SMF to specify that NPM will log the network

data records to SMF.

CLOCK and DAILY

Set these parameters to match the time and frequency of the collection period.

npm10—Enable network collection

Verify that NPM can collect data from resources supported by the Network

Performance feature components by verifying that the resource definitions contain

NPACOLL=YES. If the resource is an X.25 or a NEO resource, the resource

definitions should contain NPACOLL=(YES,EXTENDED).

Note: This release of Network Performance feature does not support Frame Relay,

Ethernet, and ODLC resources

Specify this parameter in the NCPs and verify that the setting in the GENERIC

command does not overwrite the value specified in the NCP.

Verify that NPA=YES or NPA=(YES,DR) is defined on the NCP BUILD statement.

npm11—Verify line speed

The line utilization, X.25 utilization, and NEO utilization components all depend

on the correct line speed definition. Define the line speed in one of the following

sources:

v SPEED on the LINE macro in the NCP source

v NPM.SPEED on the LINE macro in the NCP source

v SPEED on the GENERIC statement in an NPM Exec

v SPEED on the LINE statement in an NPM Exec

npm12—Collect transit time

Ensure that you have completed all the steps necessary to install the NPM session

data collection function. If NPM has to support NetView Access Services (NVAS)

or TPX** (in NPM 2.2), the install steps for collecting session data for Session

Managers must be performed.

Define the session collection function to measure the NPM transit time by

application. For each application in which you want to measure the transit time,

define a SESSCOLL command.

Collecting transit-time data by application rather than by NCP saves common

storage area (CSA). You need not define SESSCOLL=YES in the NCP statement for

the Network Performance feature to collect transit-time data.

Refer to the NPM Installation and Customization for detailed information.

Chapter 7. Customizing NetView and NPM 151

npm13—Define NPM APPL statements

To specify the applications for which you want NPM to perform session data

collection, define an APPL statement in the NPM initialization member, FNMINIT.

The APPL statement defines application characteristics for data collection. The

parameters you must check are:

APPL MAXL=...,RSP=...,TYPE=...,SYNCOUNT=...,SYNMASK=...

SYN, SYNCOUNT, and SYNMASK

If you define a synonym name for the application, you must match this name

with the synonym name defined in the Network Performance feature

administration dialog.

MAXL

The maximum number of LUs.

RSP

This parameter controls whether the application uses dynamic definite

response (DDR). RSP=YES enables the application for DDR.

TYPE

This parameter specifies if the application is IMS or NVAS.

Refer to the NPM Installation and Customization for more information about the

APPL statement.

npm14—Define transit-time objective

The SESSCOLL command defines the objective for NPM transit time. Use the

SESSCOLL command to define:

v Transit-time objectives for the categories operator (OPER), host (HOST), and

network (NET). The Network Performance feature uses the high threshold value

for the OPER, HOST, and NET parameters as the service-level objective.

v Boundary values (BVAL). The BVAL parameter sets the boundary values used in

measuring transit time.

The THRESHOLD statement in the NPM initialization member, FNMINIT, defines

the default values.

npm15—Collect session data for each resource

To define the time to start and stop data collection for each application monitored

by NPM, add a SESSCOLL command to the NPM commands member, FNMSTRT.

You can also issue the SESSCOLL command from the console with NPM 1.6 and

later releases. The parameters you must check are:

SESSCOLL RESOURCE=..,BVAL=..,DAILY=..,CLOCK=..,HOST=..,NETWORK=..,OPERATOR=...

RESOURCE

This parameter should be set to the name of the actual application.

BVAL

This parameter defines the boundary values that depend on the operator

objective (high threshold). You should set boundary value 2 or 3 equal to the

operator objective to track how the transit time compares to the objective.

CLOCK and DAILY

Set these parameters to match the time and frequency of the collection period.

HOST

This parameter defines the high threshold value, which you should set equal to

152 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

the host transit-time objective. The Network Performance feature uses the

value of this parameter as the objective when processing transit-time data.

NETWORK

This parameter defines the high threshold value, which you should set equal to

the network transit-time objective. The Network Performance feature uses the

value of this parameter as the objective when processing transit-time data.

OPERATOR

This parameter defines the high threshold value, which you should set equal to

the operator transit-time objective. The Network Performance feature uses the

value of this parameter as the objective when processing transit-time data.

npm16—Enable LAN data collection

Ensure that NPM, NetView, and the LAN Manager(s) are set up correctly to collect

the LAN bridge and/or segment data. Verify the NPM statement in the NPM

initialization member FNMINIT. The parameters you must check are:

NPM ....,LAN=....,LANCOLL=....

LAN

Set this parameter to SMF. This parameter specifies that NPM will log the LAN

interval records to SMF.

LANCOLL

Set this parameter to YES. This parameter specifies that LAN data will be

collected by NPM.

Refer to NPM Installation and Customization for detailed information.

npm17—Define LAN Managers

Each LAN manager that NPM will collect data from must be defined. Verify that a

LANMGR command is defined in FNMSCMDS or FNMSTRT for each LAN

Manager in your network. The parameters you must check are:

LANMGR ADDRESS=....,SP=....,OPTION=....

ADDRESS

This parameter specifies the adapter address used by the LAN Manager.

SP™

This parameter specifies the PU name of the LAN Manager service point as

defined to VTAM.

OPTION

Set this parameter to ADD and it will add this LAN Manager to NPM.

npm18—Define the LAN collection interval

Verify that the bridge and segment collection intervals are correct by checking the

NPM statement in the NPM initialization member FNMINIT. The parameters you

must check are:

NPM ....,LBRGINT=....,LSEGINT=....

LBRGINT

This parameter specifies the interval and interval synchronization for collecting

LAN bridge data. The default is (15,0).

LSEGINT

This parameter specifies the interval and interval synchronization for collecting

LAN segment data. The default is (15,0,40).

Chapter 7. Customizing NetView and NPM 153

Refer to “Using the INTERVAL parameter” in the NPM Installation and

Customization.

154 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

npm19—Collect LAN bridge data

For each LAN bridge you want to collect data from, code an LBRGCOLL

command in FNMSTRT or start LAN data collection using NPM online panels, an

NPM EXEC, or NPM console support. The parameters you must check are:

LBRGCOLL BRIDGE=....,BC=....,NB=....,LF=....,CLOCK=....,DAILY=....

BRIDGE

This parameter specifies the name of the bridge.

BC

If you want to include threshold for broadcast frames forwarded in the

reporting, set the high threshold parameter for segment 1 and segment 2 equal

to the threshold value.

NB

If you want to include threshold for nonbroadcast frames forwarded in the

reporting, set the high threshold parameter for segment 1 and segment 2 equal

to the threshold value.

LF If you want to include threshold for lost frames in the reporting, set the high

threshold parameter for segment 1 and segment 2 equal to the threshold value.

CLOCK and DAILY

Set these parameters to match the time and frequency of the collection period.

npm20—Collect LAN segment data

For each LAN segment you want to collect data from, code an LSEGCOLL

command in FNMSTRT or start LAN data collection using NPM online panels,

NPM Desk/2, an NPM EXEC, or NPM console support. The parameters you must

check are:

LSEGCOLL SEGMENT=....,SEGUTIL=....,CLOCK=....,DAILY=....

SEGMENT

This parameter specifies the segment number.

SEGUTIL

If you want to include threshold for segment utilization in the reporting, set

the high threshold parameter equal to the threshold value.

CLOCK and DAILY

Set these parameters to match the time and frequency of the collection period.

npm21—Enable VTAM data collection

Ensure that NPM is set up correctly to collect the VTAM data. Verify the NPM

statement in the NPM initialization member FNMINIT. The parameter you must

check is:

NPM ....,VTAMCOLL=....

VTAMCOLL

Set this parameter to YES. This parameter specifies that VTAM data can be

collected by NPM.

Refer to the NPM Installation and Customization for detailed information.

Chapter 7. Customizing NetView and NPM 155

npm22—Changing the VTAM interval

The default interval number can be changed by the VTAMINT keywords on the

DEFAULTS statement in FNMINIT. Refer to the NPM Installation and Customization

for detailed information.

npm23—Collect VTAM data

Ensure that VTAM data is collected for resources that you want to process by the

installed Network Performance feature function.

To collect VTAM Execute command Notes

Address space data VADRCOLL

Application data VAPLCOLL

Buffer pool data VBPLCOLL Network Performance feature does not support

any information related to the threshold

parameters.

Device data VDEVCOLL To make the maintenance easier you should

define a command for each resource category

(for example, ALLCTC, ALLLOCAL).

Network Performance feature does not support

any information related to the threshold

parameters.

Global data VGBLCOLL Network Performance feature does not support

any information related to the threshold

parameters.

Virtual route data VVRCOLL Network Performance feature does not support

any information related to the threshold

parameters.

The command parameters you must check are:

INTERVAL=...,DEST=...,CLOCK=...,DAILY=...

INTERVAL

This parameter specifies which of the collection intervals (1 to 7) to use. You

can use different intervals for different resources. If you use the default base

interval value, an even interval (2, 4, or 6) is recommended.

DEST

You must set this parameter to SMF to specify that NPM will log the network

data records to SMF.

CLOCK and DAILY

Set these parameters to match the time and frequency of the collection period.

The commands have to be either coded in FNMSTRT or started using NPM online

panels, an NPM EXEC, or NPM console support. Refer to the NPM Installation and

Customization for detailed information.

npm24—Define routers to NPM

Ensure that NPM has information for the network configuration (routers) by:

v Setting the SNMPACCT parameter to YES in the NPM initialization member

FNMINIT

v Checking the IP Host definition statements in the NPM initialization member

FNMSTRT

156 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

The parameters you must check are:

SNMPTGT ....COMM=....,PORT=...., ....

COMM

This field is set with the SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string that the

SNMP component should use when attempting to retrieve MIB data from a

target. If null, then the winsnmp assumes that the target is an SNMPv3 entity.

Null (0) fills any unused portion of this field. Defaults to public in lowercase.

PORT

Specifies the UDP port of the SNMP agent in the SNMP-manageable network

element. Defaults to 161.

Refer to the NPM User’s Guide for detailed information.

npm25—Collect network data for SNMP routers

Ensure that network data is collected for resources supported by the installed

Network Performance feature functions by adding the IPCOLL commands to the

NPM commands member FNMSTRT for those network resources whose data you

want to collect.

Refer to “Collecting IP Performance Data” in the NPM Concepts and Planning for

more information.

The IPCOLL command

The parameters you must check are:

IPCOLL...,INTERVAL=...,DEST=...,CLOCK=...,DAILY=...

INTERVAL

This parameter specifies which of the collection intervals (1 to 7) to use. You

can use different intervals for different resources. If you use the default base

interval value, an even interval (2, 4, or 6) is recommended.

DEST

You must set this parameter to SMF to specify that NPM will log the network

data records to SMF.

CLOCK and DAILY

Set these parameters to match the time and frequency of the collection period.

Refer to the NPM User’s Guide for detailed information.

Chapter 7. Customizing NetView and NPM 157

158 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Chapter 8. Testing and maintaining the Network Performance

feature

This chapter contains information on running a test job, evaluating the results,

making modifications, moving the Network Performance feature into production,

and performing maintenance on an in-production feature.

Testing the Network Performance feature

After you have installed the Network Performance feature and defined the

environment information, you can test the feature. The goal of the test procedure is

to create reports, which you can then check to ensure that the feature is collecting

and processing data as expected. If you find errors during the evaluation process,

they are probably due to problems with either planning and implementation

After you determine the source of the problem and correct it, you can move the

test system into production.

Collecting data

To effectively test the Network Performance feature, you must create collect

procedures for all installed components. Collecting data for all components ensures

that all the data analysis procedures are tested and eases the transition between

testing and production.

To collect data, modify the sample batch collect job supplied with Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS. The job is in member DRLJCOLL in the DRL170.SDRLCNTL

library. Refer to the Administration Guide for information on modifying the

DRLJCOLL member and running a collect job. The collect job for the network

configuration component is in member DRLJCOVP. Refer to the Network

Performance Feature Reference for information on the DRLJCOVP member.

When you first install the Network Performance feature, you should collect data

for one or two components for a few days to verify that the collect procedure is

working properly.

To collect data, write COLLECT statements in the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

log collector language. These statements specify:

v The log from which data is collected

v What data is collected

v The data set to which the collected data is written

Refer to the Language Guide and Reference for more information about the COLLECT

statement. After you write the statements to collect the data, run the collect job to

execute the statements and collect the data. Refer to the Administration Guide for

more information about running a collect job.

Generating reports

After accumulating data in the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database by

running COLLECT statements, generate reports to view and evaluate the data.

When you install a Network Performance feature component, several of predefined

reports are installed as part of that component.

159

Because the reports view the SMF data over different time frames, you must collect

data for several weeks or months to produce some reports. For example, a report

showing performance trends over the course of a year is meaningful only after you

have accumulated data from several months to a year. As a result, you may not be

able to check the accuracy of such long-term reports during the testing period. For

more information about reports provided with the Network Performance feature,

refer to the Network Performance Feature Reports.

You generate reports through the Reports option in the Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS administration dialog. For more information on generating reports, refer to

the Guide to the Reporting Dialog.

Evaluating test data

After you have tested the Network Performance feature by collecting data and

producing reports, judge whether or not the reports look as you expected. If the

reports are not correct, you must determine whether the problem lies in planning

or implementation. To find an error:

1. Check the data collection messages and verify that Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS collected the data correctly.

2. Go back through the entire implementation process for the components and

check for errors. Start with the planning process (see Chapter 2, “Planning,” on

page 9) and verify that you entered all the environment information correctly

and performed NetView and NPM customization properly.

Checking SMF records

If Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS does not have access to the required SMF data,

any reports you produce will be blank or contain incorrect data.

Ensure that you have a list of all the components you installed before you begin

this procedure.

To check the SMF records, follow these steps

1. Edit the DRLJNWCH member in the SDRL.CNTL data set.

2. Modify the JCL to match your installation’s requirements.

3. Type SUBMIT to begin the checking procedure.

4. When the batch job completes, check the job output.

The output first lists the number of SMF records processed by each record

definition. The sample output in Figure 115 shows that the SMF_039_1_TO_7

record definition processed 514 482 SMF records, while 428 908 records were

not recognized as mapping the SMF_039_1_TO_7 record definition.

160 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

The output also lists, for each record definition, the number of records

processed for each subtype. Figure 116 shows the SMF type 39 subtypes

mapping the SMF_039_1_to_7 record definition that were found in the log. For

example, there were 94 664 subtype 2 records.

5. Check the number of records of each type and subtype listed against the

required subtypes for each component listed in the following table.

Component Subtypes needed

Availability SMF type 39, subtypes 2, 3, 4, and 5

Configuration SMF type 37 subtypes VPD P, and VPD F

Problem SMF type 37

Session failure SMF type 39, subtypes 2, 5, 6, and 7

NetView FTP SMF type FTP, subtypes A, O, and N

RTM response time SMF type 39 subtypes 1, 2, and 5

NPM transit time SMF type 28, subtype X'20' and X'22'

Line utilization SMF type 28, subtype X'11'

NCP utilization SMF type 28 subtype X'10'

NPM internal utilization SMF type 28 subtype X'F8'

PU utilization SMF type 28 subtype X'12'

NV/SM internal utilization SMF type 39 subtype 8

NEO utilization SMF type 28, subtypes X'72' and X'73'

NTRI utilization SMF type 28, subtypes X'70' and X'71'

DRL0302I Processing IBM.NETWORK.LOG on LOGL08 .

DRL0341I The first record timestamp is 1998-02-01-00.21.11.810000.

DRL0342I The last record timestamp is 1998-02-06-10.09.02.630000.

DRL0380I 943390 records read from the input log.

DRL0003I

DRL0315I Records read from the log or built by log procedure:

DRL0317I Record name | Number

DRL0318I -------------------|----------

DRL0319I SMF_039_1_TO_7 | 514482

DRL0320I Unrecognized | 428908

DRL0318I -------------------|----------

DRL0321I Total | 943390

DRL0381I 7 records written to the DRLLST1 file.

DRL0301I List ended at 1999-01-15-20.17.04.

Figure 115. SMF checking output—records processed by record definition

DRL0301I List ended at 1999-01-15-20.58.23.

LOGRSUBT COUNT(LOGRSUBT)

----------- ---------------

2 94664

3 117442

4 166196

5 577

7 135603

LOGRSUBT COUNT(LOGRSUBT)

----------- ---------------

8 106

Figure 116. SMF checking output—subtypes listed

Chapter 8. Testing and Maintaining the feature 161

Component Subtypes needed

LAN utilization SMF type 28, subtypes X'B3' and X'C3'

ODLC utilization SMF type 28, subtypes X'A0' and X'A1'

X.25 utilization SMF type 28, subtypes X'74', X'75', and X'77'

VTAM utilization SMF type 28, subtypes X'D6' through X'DB'

Frame Relay utilization SMF type 28, subtypes X'82', X'83', X'84', and X'85'

SNMP routers utilization SMF type 28, subtypes X'14', X'15', X'16', and X'17'

If the output shows that no records were collected for a type and subtype

required by an installed component, check for errors in the NetView or NPM

customization required by the component. See Chapter 7, “Customizing

NetView and NPM,” on page 141 for information on NetView and NPM

customization.

Moving the feature into production

The tasks of collecting data for the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database,

purging data from the database, and creating reports from the data are common to

all features in Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS. These tasks are performed by

using the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS administration dialog and the Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS reporting dialog. Figure 117 illustrates the general

process of working with Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS data.

NetView and NPM statements log NetView and NPM data into SMF. These

statements define the data set that contains the SMF data, what data is logged, and

Figure 117. Database tasks

162 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

how often the data is logged. For information on creating these statements, see

“Determining NetView customization tasks” on page 141.

Collecting data in production

To be able to collect data in the Network Performance feature, you must create

collect jobs for the components. If you created collect batch jobs for all components

during the testing procedure, you should be able to use these statements with little

modification.

If you did not test all the components, you must create more collect jobs, or

modify and use the existing jobs. Refer to the Language Guide and Reference for

more information about running a collect job.

Factors to consider when collecting data in production are:

v Run the collect job daily to ensure that your network data is current and to

reduce the amount of time required for the collect job to run.

v Run a backup job regularly. Refer to the Administration Guide for more

information about running a backup job.

v Keep NetView and NPM running while Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS is

collecting data. These programs must continue to produce data for future

collects.

v When you first run the batch collect jobs, the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

database will grow until Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS reaches the end of the

retention period. When running a purge job, Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

purges data older than a specified time, and the size of the database stabilizes.

Purging data

When you run a collect job, Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS collects data from

SMF into the tables that make up the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database.

As you run more collect jobs, more data accumulates and the tables grow larger. To

prevent the database tables from taking too much space, run purge jobs

periodically to remove old data from the tables.

Write DEFINE PURGE statements that define what data is to be removed from the

database. Then run a PURGE job to execute the DEFINE PURGE statements and

actually remove the data. Each DEFINE PURGE statement specifies the table from

which data is to be removed and the criteria for selecting the data to be removed.

Refer to the Language Guide and Reference for more information about the DEFINE

PURGE statement. Refer to the Administration Guide for information on running

PURGE statements.

When you install the Network Performance feature, certain PURGE statements are

already defined. These statements establish default purge periods for Administration

Guide tables based on the table suffix. The following table lists the default periods.

Table suffix Purge period

_T 7 days

_H (hourly) 7 days

_D (daily) 30 days

_W (weekly) 375 days

_M (monthly) 765 days

Chapter 8. Testing and Maintaining the feature 163

If you want to change these defaults, modify the PURGE statements that affect

these tables. You can access these statements from the list of tables in the

administration dialog. For information on modifying the PURGE statements for

these tables, refer to the Administration Guide.

Creating reports in production

After accumulating data in the database by running COLLECT statements, you can

create reports to view and interpret the data. For more information on the reports

provided with the Network Performance feature, refer to Network Performance

Feature Reports.

Reports are generated through the Reports option in the Tivoli Decision Support

for z/OS administration dialog. For more information on generating reports, refer

to the Guide to Reporting Dialog.

Performing maintenance

After you have placed the Network Performance feature into production, you must

perform regular maintenance activities to ensure that the environment data in the

Network Performance feature resource table is current. You may also have to use

administration tasks to diagnose problems with data collection or reporting.

Keeping resource information current

Because resource information originates outside of Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS, either in STATMON or an external source, changes to the resource

information must be coordinated so the information is consistent between the

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database and the outside source. The key to

successfully coordinating the data is designating a primary source for the resource

data. First, update the primary source, then apply the changes to the other resource

databases. You can designate any database of resource information as the primary

source, although the process of updating the information is easier if you follow the

recommendations outlined in “Performing maintenance with STATMON” or

“Performing maintenance with an external source” on page 166.

Performing maintenance with STATMON

You must update Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS with new network resource or

configuration information as soon as possible. When your network changes, run

STATMON again using the VTAMLST statements that define the network. When

you have created the STATMON output file, follow these steps to add the new

data to Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS:

1. From the Network Administration Primary Option window, type 1 and press

Enter.

The Set Defaults and Load Data window (Figure 118) appears.

164 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

2. Move the cursor to the system you want to update, type 1, and press Enter.

The Edit Resource Defaults window appears (see Figure 40 on page 71).

3. Change the resource defaults if necessary, and press Enter.

The Load Options window (Figure 119) appears.

4. Type 3 and press Enter.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS merges the STATMON data into the existing

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database and the Network Administration

Primary Option window appears.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS combines the resource data using these rules:

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

Type an action code next to the system ID for the data that you are

loading.

1 - Edit 2 - Delete 1 (for **NEW**) - Create

Action System ID System description

_ **NEW**

_ NETSYS1 Network domain 1

_ NETSYS2 Network domain 2

_ VENDSYS Vendor network

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F13=Help F15=Exit F19=Bkwd F20=Fwd F24=Cancel

Figure 118. Specifying the system to edit

Set Defaults and Load Data ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Load Options |

| |

| Select the way the resource data is loaded: |

| |

| 1 1. Load STATMON data. |

| 2. Load database table. |

| 3. Merge STATMON data and database table. |

| 4. Add STATMON data to the work table. |

| |

| Use the choices as follows: |

| |

| 1. Use this to build a new resource table. |

| 2. Use this to make minor changes to your resource table. |

| 3. Use this to update your resource table with new STATMON data. |

| 4. Use this to combine STATMON data from multiple systems. |

| |

| F1=Help F2=Split F9=Swap F12=Cancel |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

---------------------------

| Process system NETSYS1. |

---------------------------

Command ===> ______________________________________________________________

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F9=Swap F12=Cancel

Figure 119. Load Options window

Chapter 8. Testing and Maintaining the feature 165

v Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS adds resources in STATMON but not in Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS and gives those resources a new (N) status.

v Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS ignores resources that are in STATMON, but

retains Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS data and gives those resources an old

(O) status.

v Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS retains resources that are in Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS but not in STATMON and gives those resources a missing (D)

status.

When Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS ignores duplicated resources, it loses

changes to existing resources in VTAM (for example, assigning an existing cluster

to a different line). You must make these changes manually. See “Verifying resource

data” on page 98 for information on making these changes.

Performing maintenance with an external source

When you use an external source for resource information, that source is the

primary repository for resource data. Whenever the network changes, change the

external file first, then use that updated file to load the new data into the

NW_RESOURCE table. Import data from the external source whenever the

network resource information changes.

166 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Appendix A. Sample STATMON Inputs and Outputs

This appendix provides VTAMLST statements to STATMON to define the sample

network configuration and the STATMON output produced as a result of those

statements. The sample network defined by these statements is described in

Chapter 6, “Administration Dialog Example,” on page 109.

VTAMLST input to STATMON

This extract of the VTAMLST statements describes the network configuration for

domain 1 in the example in Chapter 6, “Administration Dialog Example,” on page

109. These statements are used as input to the STATMON preprocessor.

UCX4 BUILD BFRS=240, RECOMMENDED FOR USE WITH HPTSS *

DSABLTO=3.0, TIMEOUT FOR DATA SET READY *

ENABLTO=6.0, TIMEOUT FOR DATA SET READY-ENABLE *

LOADLIB=NCPLOAD, NCP LOAD LIBRARY NAME *

MAXSSCP=2, MAX NUMBER OF SSCP’S *

MAXSUBA=63, MAX SUBAREA NETWORK ADDRESS *

MEMSIZE=4M, 4 MEGABYTES FOR THE NCP TO USE *

MODEL=3725, 3725 *

NEWNAME=UCX4, LOAD MODULE MEMBER NAME *

NPA=YES, REQUIRED FOR NPM *

. . . . . . .

SYSMVS1 HOST BFRPAD=0, NO OF PAD CHARACTERS FOR VTAM *

INBFRS=15, BUFS TO ALLOC FOR TRANS FROM VTAM *

MAXBFRU=35, BUFS TO ALLOC FOR TRANS FROM NCP *

UNITSZ=256, SIZE OF VTAM BUF UNITS *

SUBAREA=10 HOST SUBAREA NUMBER

*

SYSMVS2 HOST BFRPAD=0, NO OF PAD CHARACTERS FOR VTAM *

INBFRS=15, BUFS TO ALLOC FOR TRANS FROM VTAM *

MAXBFRU=35, BUFS TO ALLOC FOR TRANS FROM NCP *

UNITSZ=256, SIZE OF VTAM BUF UNITS *

SUBAREA=11 HOST SUBAREA NUMBER

. . . . . . .

*

V40LKNF8 LINE ADDRESS=(040,HALF),SPEED=9600,NPACOLL=YES, *

OWNER=NET1, *

SESSION=10

*

V42FFTC6 CLUSTER CUTYPE=3271, *

OWNER=NET1, *

GPOLL=40407F7F

. . . . . . .

LNEM010 LINE ADDRESS=(010,HALF), LINE ADDRESS *

ISTATUS=ACTIVE INITIAL STATUS ACTIVE *

NPACOLL=YES NPA/NPM

*

CLSM010 PU ADDR=A0, HEXADECIMAL 8 BIT LINE ADDR *

PUTYPE=2, PHYSICAL UNIT TYPE *

MAXDATA=265, MAX NUMBER OF DATA IN SEGMENT *

ISTATUS=ACTIVE INITIAL STATUS ACTIVE

*

* LOGICAL UNITS

*

CLSM0100 LU LOCADDR=2, 1ST LU *

PACING=1

CLSM0101 LU LOCADDR=3, 2ND LU *

167

PACING=1

CLSM0102 LU LOCADDR=4, 3RD LU *

PACING=1

CLSM0103 LU LOCADDR=5, 4TH LU *

PACING=1

CLSM0104 LU LOCADDR=6, 5TH LU *

PACING=1

. . . . . . .

CLSM010E LU LOCADDR=16 15TH LU *

PACING=1

CLSM010F LU LOCADDR=17, 16TH LU *

PACING=1

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

CDR1 VBUILD TYPE=CDRM

CDR2 CDRM SUBAREA=11,

CDRDYN=YES, DYNAMIC DEFINITION

CDRSC=OPT, DYNAMIC DEFINITION

ELEMENT=1, HOST SUBAREA

VPACING=0,

ISTATUS=ACTIVE

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

ATSOMAJ VBUILD TYPE=APPL APPLICATION MAJOR NODE

*

ATSO APPL AUTH=(NOACQ,NOCNM,PASS,TSO,NOPO), *

EAS=1,ACBNAME=TSO

*

ATSO0001 APPL AUTH=(NOACQ,NOCNM,PASS,TSO,NOPO), *

EAS=1,ACBNAME=TSO0001

*

ATSO0002 APPL AUTH=(NOACQ,NOCNM,PASS,TSO,NOPO), *

EAS=1,ACBNAME=TSO0002

*

ATSO0003 APPL AUTH=(NOACQ,NOCNM,PASS,TSO,NOPO), *

EAS=1,ACBNAME=TSO0003

*

ATSO0004 APPL AUTH=(NOACQ,NOCNM,PASS,TSO,NOPO), *

EAS=1,ACBNAME=TSO0004

*

ATSO0005 APPL AUTH=(NOACQ,NOCNM,PASS,TSO,NOPO), *

EAS=1,ACBNAME=TSO0005

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

AIMS APPL EAS=4, ESTIMATED CONCURRENT SESSIONS *

ACBNAME=AIMS, APPLID FOR ACB *

AUTH=(ACQ,BLOCK,PASS) IMS CAN ACQUIRE & PASS TMLS

. . . . . . .

*

STATMON output

This extract of the output produced by the STATMON preprocessor corresponds to

the VTAMLST statements that describe the network configuration for domain 1.

The STATMON output is used in the example in Chapter 6, “Administration

Dialog Example,” on page 109.

R HOST1 SA: 10 H

R AIMS APPLICATION A Y N

. . . . . . .

R ATSOMAJ APPL MAJ NODE B N

168 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

R ATSO APPLICATION A Y N

R ATSO0001 APPLICATION A Y N

R ATSO0002 APPLICATION A Y N

R ATSO0003 APPLICATION A Y N

R ATSO0004 APPLICATION A Y N

R ATSO0005 APPLICATION A Y N

. . . . . . .

R CDR1 CDRM MAJ NODE Y N

R CDR2 CDRM Z Y

. . . . . . .

R UCX4 NCP MAJOR NODE NN N

R V40LKNF8 LINE L Y

R V42FFTC6 CLUSTER C Y

. . . . . . .

R LNEM010 LINE L Y

R CLSM010 PU C Y

R CLSM0100 LU T Y

R CLSM0101 LU T Y

R CLSM0102 LU T Y

R CLSM0103 LU T Y

R CLSM0104 LU T Y

R CLSM0105 LU T Y

R CLSM0106 LU T Y

R CLSM0107 LU T Y

R CLSM0108 LU T Y

R CLSM0109 LU T Y

R CLSM010A LU T Y

R CLSM010B LU T Y

R CLSM010C LU T Y

R CLSM010D LU T Y

R CLSM010E LU T Y

R CLSM010F LU T Y

Appendix A. Sample STATMON Inputs and Outputs 169

170 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Appendix B. External Data File Format

This appendix contains the format of the external resource data file.

The Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Network Performance feature lets you

import resource data from an external data file into its resource work table. The

external data file must be in the format shown in the following table. If you export

resource data using the dialog, the data is written in the same format. The format

of the resource work table used in the Network Performance Feature is the same as

the format of the external data file, except the TABNAME field is omitted.

If you want to use this method to import data into the Network Performance

feature from a database external to the feature, you must write a program to

produce the contents of your database in this format.

You must define the external data file for import with these characteristics:

v Record length must be greater than 180 bytes

v Block size must be greater than 184 bytes

v Data set organization must be partitioned (PO)

v Record format must be variable (V) or variable blocked (VB)

The external data file created by SLR 3.3 must have these characteristics:

v Record length must be at least 150 bytes

v Block size must be at least 154 bytes

Note: All the fields in the external data file, including fields where numeric values

are required, must be written in character format (EBCDIC) and be left

justified.

Offset Field name Length Description

1 TABNAME 8 Table name

9 RESNAME 8 Resource name

17 SYSTEM 4 System identifier

21 RESTYPE 8 Resource type

29 RESDESC 20 Resource description

49 SYNONYM 8 Resource synonym name

57 GROUP 8 Group name

65 ALTGROUP 8 Reserved

73 ACBNAME 8 Resource ACB name

81 OWNCDRM 8 Cross-domain name

89 NCP 8 NCP name

97 LINE 8 Line name

105 MTASK 1 Multiple-task indicator

106 STASK 4 Reserved

110 AVAIL 5 Availability percentage value

115 STAB 5 Stability value

120 TRANOBJ 5 Transit-time objective

171

Offset Field name Length Description

125 SAUTI 5 Reserved

130 LINETHR 5 Reserved

135 AVAILPRO 1 Availability process indicator

136 ACCIND 1 Reserved

139 COM 3 Communication type

141 STATUS 1 Resource status

142 AVAILREP 1 Availability report indicator

143 HOSTNAME 8 Reserved

151 NETNAME 8 Reserved

159 THRESH1 5 Reserved

164 THRESH2 5 Reserved

This list provides a detailed explanation of each field in the external data file:

TABNAME Table name. This is the internal name used by the Network

Performance feature for this table. When creating an export file, the

Network Performance feature writes DRLTNRES in this field. For

compatibility with SLR 3.3 Network Reporter, the feature accepts

DRETNRES in an import file.

RESNAME Resource name. Set this field to the VTAM name for the resource.

SYSTEM System identifier. Set this field to the SMF ID recorded in the SMF

records for this resource.

RESTYPE Resource type. Set this field to NCP, LINE, CLUSTER, LOCAL,

SWITCHED, CONN, APPL, or GROUP.

RESDESC Resource description. Set this field to a user-defined description of

the resource. This description is used in the reports.

SYNONYM Resource synonym name. Set this field to the name to be used in

the reports for this resource. This name must be defined for

resource types APPL, NCP, and CONN.

GROUP Group name. Set this field to the name of the group that the

resource belongs to. This name is used in the reports. The field

must be defined for all resource types.

ALTGROUP Set this field to the alternate group name, if any.

ACBNAME Resource ACB name. Set this field to the ACB name for this

resource.

OWNCDRM Cross-domain name. Set this field to the name of the cross-domain

resource for the host system where this resource is defined.

NCP NCP name. Set this field to the name of the NCP resource that this

resource is attached to. This name must be defined for resource

types LINE and CLUSTER.

LINE Line name. Set this field to the name of the line that connects this

resource to the NCP. This must be defined for resource type

CLUSTER.

MTASK Multiple-task indicator. Set this field to Y or N. This field indicates

172 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

whether this resource is a multiple-task application such as TSO.

This field must be defined for resource type APPL.

STASK Set this field to 0. This field is reserved for future use.

AVAIL Availability percentage value. Set this field to the service-level

objective value for availability of this resource. This should be set

to the character representation of a value between 0 and 100,

allowing up to 2 decimal places. Define this value only if you

report on the availability of this resource. If you do not use this

field, specify a value of 0.

STAB Stability value. Set this field to the service-level objective value for

the maximum number of down events permitted in a schedule.

This field should be set to the character representation of a value

between 0 and 9.999, allowing up to 3 decimal places. Define this

only if you report the availability of this resource. If you do not

use this field, specify a value of 0.

TRANOBJ Transit-time objective. Set this field to the service-level objective

value for the minimum percentage of transactions that should meet

the network transit-time objective. This should be set to the

character representation of a value between 0 and 100, allowing up

to 2 decimal places. Define this only if you report service levels for

this resource. If you do not use this field, specify a value of 0.

SAUTI Reserved (set to 0).

LINETHR Reserved (set to 0).

AVAILPRO Availability process indicator. Set this field to Y or N to indicate

whether this resource is tracked for availability.

ACCIND Reserved.

COM Communication type. Set this field to NCP, LNE, CLU, LOC, SWI,

CDM, APP, or GRP, to correspond to the resource type. These

indicators are used for resource types NCP, LINE, CLUSTER,

LOCAL, SWITCHED, CONN, APPL, and GROUP, respectively.

STATUS Resource status.

AVAILREP Availability report indicator. Set this field to Y or N to indicate

whether the resource should be included in availability reports.

HOSTNAME Reserved.

NETNAME Reserved.

THRESH1 Reserved.

THRESH2 Reserved.

Appendix B. External Data File Format 173

174 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Appendix C. Using the DRLENR2X User Exit

This appendix contains an example of the DRLENR2X user exit. The Network

Performance feature calls this exit when running the code associated with Set

Defaults and Load Data. To change the code for the user exit, copy the code from

the target library (DRL170.SDRLEXEC) to your local EXEC library.

/* REXX **********************************************************/

/* */

/* Example of use of the DRLENR2X User exit. */

/* Copy the exit skeleton from the distribution library to */

/* your local exec library. */

/* */

/* This code is meant as an example and is supplied on an */

/* AS IS basis. */

/* */

/* Program name: DRLENR2X */

/* */

/* Descriptive name: */

/* EPDM NW User access exit */

/* */

/* Function: */

/* Enable user to access the contents of the Network */

/* DRLTNRES DRLTNEX1 ISPF tables. */

/* */

/* Input: */

/* Parameters: None. */

/* ISPF variables in shared pool: None. */

/* */

/* Output: */

/* Parameters and ISPF variables returned: None. */

/* Return codes: 0 = Do not save data. */

/* 4 = Save data. */

/* 20 = Syntax or Halt Errors. */

/* */

/* Operation: */

/* User added code. */

/* */

/*****************************************************************/

Signal on Syntax /* Trap syntax errors */

Signal on Halt /* Trap interrupt errors */

Parse Source . . module . /* Module name */

Address "ISPEXEC" /* ISPF Environment */

"CONTROL ERRORS RETURN" /* Handle all errors myself */

"VGET (DRLTRACE) PROFILE" /* Get debug var */

If Pos(module, drltrace) > 0 Then Trace "?A"

save = 4

nosave = 0

/*****************************************************************/

/* Insert your processing code here. */

/*****************************************************************/

/* Table DRLTNRES and DRLTNEX1 are open. You don’t have to save */

/* the updated data in the exit. Just flag if you want caller */

/* to save your updated tables. */

/* */

/* Set save_flag to save if you need to save your changes. */

/* Set save_flag to nosave if you don’t need to save changes. */

/* */

175

/*****************************************************************/

save_flag = nosave /* Set no saving of the data as default */

/*****************************************************************/

/* Go to top of the table */

/*****************************************************************/

"TBTOP DRLTNRES"

/***************************************************************/

/* Set first time flag */

/***************************************************************/

first_time = ’Y’

/***************************************************************/

/* Loop thru the table */

/***************************************************************/

Do Forever

/*************************************************************/

/* Get data from ISPF */

/*************************************************************/

"TBSKIP DRLTNRES"

skip_rc = rc

If skip_rc > 8 Then

Do

/*********************************************************/

/* Error in TBSKIP just tell and leave */

/*********************************************************/

Say ’An error occurred’

save_flag = nosave

Leave

End

/*************************************************************/

/* End of table */

/*************************************************************/

If skip_rc = 8 Then

Do

save_flag = save

Leave

End

/*************************************************************/

/* Process the table row: */

/* */

/* Naming convention as follows: */

/* */

/* XXXNNLLP */

/* */

/* XXX = X25, LON, LAX, LUX ....... */

/* NN = NCP subarea number */

/* LL = NCP Line address in hex */

/* P = PU address on line in hex */

/* */

/* By using the X25 we are able to determine that */

/* this resource is an X25 resource. */

/* */

/* We want to track availability on the X25 resources, */

/* by changing the resource type from SWITCHED to */

/* CLUSTER and resetting some parameters in this */

/* example. */

/* */

/*************************************************************/

If Substr(resname,1,3) = ’X25’ Then

Do

/*********************************************************/

/* Process only the first time */

176 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

/*********************************************************/

If first_time = ’Y’ Then

Do

/* Add default X25 NCP & Line & Group */

first_time = ’N’ /* Reset first time flag */

End

avail = ’95’ /* Set default availability */

stab = ’0.033’ /* Set default stability */

tranobj = ’93’ /* Set transit time obj */

availpro = ’Y’ /* Set availability on */

availrep = ’Y’ /* Set availability reports on */

restype = ’CLUSTER’ /* Set to CLUSTER */

line = ’X25LINE’ /* Set line name */

ncp = ’X25NCP’ /* Set ncp name */

group = ’X25GROUP’ /* Set group name */

"TBMOD DRLTNRES ORDER"

End

End

Exit save_flag

/*****************************************************************/

/* Syntax error discovered */

/*****************************************************************/

Syntax:

drlmsg = ’Syntax error trapped in: ’module

Say drlmsg

"LOG MSG(DRLD654)"

drlmsg = ’REXX return code ’rc ’ in line ’sigl’: ’errortext(rc)

Say drlmsg

"LOG MSG(DRLD654)"

drlmsg = ’Lines around error line are:’

Say drlmsg

"LOG MSG(DRLD654)"

Do i = Max(sigl - 5,1) To sigl + 5

drlmsg = Right(i,5,’0’)’: ’Space(Sourceline(i))

Say drlmsg

"LOG MSG(DRLD654)"

End

drlmsg = ’Report problem to your P.R. specialist’

Say drlmsg

"LOG MSG(DRLD654)"

Return 20

/*****************************************************************/

/* Interrupt errors */

/*****************************************************************/

Halt:

Say ’HI was entered EXEC ’module’ was interrupted’

Return 20

Appendix C. Using the DRLENR2X User Exit 177

178 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Appendix D. List of abbreviations

The following is a list of the abbreviations used in this book.

ACB application control block

CCU central control unit

CDRM cross-domain resource manager

CSA common service area

CTC channel to channel

DB2 DATABASE 2

DDR dynamic definite response

FTP File Transfer Program

IMS Information Management System

ISPF Interactive System Programming Facility

JCL job control language

LAN local area network

LU logical unit

NCP Network Control Program

NEO network extension option

NPM NetView Performance Monitor

NTRI NCP/Token-Ring interconnection

NVAS NetView Access Services

NV/SM NetView session monitor

ODLC outboard data link control

PU physical unit

QMF Query Management Facility

RTM response time monitor

SDLC synchronous data link control

SMF system management facilities

SMP/E System Modification Program/Extended

SNA system network architecture

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SSCP system services control program

STATMON Status Monitor

TCAS terminal control address space

TCP/IP transmission control protocol/internet protocol

TSO Time Sharing Option

179

UDP User Datagram Protocol

VPD vital product data

VTAM Virtual Telecommunication Access Method

180 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Notices

This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in

other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the

products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM

product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM

product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,

program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may

be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the

operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter

described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you

any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM Director of Licensing

IBM Corporation

North Castle Drive

Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A.

For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM

Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM World Trade Asia Corporation

Licensing

2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku

Tokyo 106, Japan

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other

country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS

PUBLICATION ″AS IS″ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain

transactions, therefore, this statement might not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.

Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be

incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements

and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this

publication at any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for

convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web

sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM

product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

181

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it

believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose

of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created

programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the

information which has been exchanged, should contact:

IBM Corporation

2Z4A/101

11400 Burnet Road

Austin, TX 78758 U.S.A.

Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions,

including in some cases payment of a fee.

The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material

available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement,

IBM International Program License Agreement or any equivalent agreement

between us.

Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled

environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments may

vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level

systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on

generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurement may have been

estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document

should verify the applicable data for their specific environment.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of

those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources.

IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of

performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products.

Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the

suppliers of those products.

All statements regarding IBM’s future direction or intent are subject to change or

withdrawal without notice, and represent goals and objectives only.

All IBM prices shown are IBM’s suggested retail prices, are current and are subject

to change without notice. Dealer prices may vary.

This information is for planning purposes only. The information herein is subject to

change before the products described become available.

This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business

operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the

names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are

fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business

enterprise is entirely coincidental.

COPYRIGHT LICENSE:

This information contains sample application programs in source language, which

illustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy,

modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to

182 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application

programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating

platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not

been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or

imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. You may copy,

modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to

IBM for the purposes of developing, using, marketing, or distributing application

programs conforming to IBM‘s application programming interfaces.

If you are viewing this information in softcopy form, the photographs and color

illustrations might not display.

Trademarks

AS/400, CICS, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, eServer, iSeries, IBM, the IBM logo,

IMS, Lotus, MVS, NetView, OS/390, Passport Advantage, pSeries, Tivoli, QMF,

Rational, Redbook, VTAM, WebSphere, z/OS, and zSeries are trademarks or

registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the

United States, other countries, or both.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other

countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other

countries.

Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks

of others.

Notices 183

184 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Glossary

A

administration. A Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

task that includes maintaining the database, updating

environment information, and ensuring the accuracy of

data collected.

administration dialog. A set of host windows used to

administer Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS.

C

code converter. A Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

table used to convert network problem codes to text

descriptions.

collect. A process used by Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS to read data from input log data sets, interpret

records in the data set, and store the data in DB2 tables

in the Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database.

component. An optionally installable part of a Tivoli

Decision Support for z/OS feature.

cross-connection. A link between two network

domains.

E

environment information. All of the information that

is added to the log data to create reports. This

information can include data such as performance

groups, shift periods, installation definitions, and so on.

I

information category. One of the divisions of

information the Network Performance feature

processes. Each information category consists of one or

more components.

L

log collector. A Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS

program that processes log data sets and provides

other Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS services.

log collector language. Tivoli Decision Support for

z/OS statements used to supply definitions to and

invoke services of the log collector.

log data set. Any sequential data set that is used as

input to Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS.

lookup table. A Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS DB2

table that contains grouping, conversion, or substitution

information.

N

network administration dialog. A set of host

windows used to administer the NW_RESOURCE

table.

R

record definition. The description of a record type

contained in the log data sets used by Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS, including detailed record layout and

data formats.

report definition language. Tivoli Decision Support

for z/OS statements used to define reports and report

groups.

report group. A collection of Tivoli Decision Support

for z/OS reports that can be referred to by a single

name.

reporting dialog. A set of host or workstation

windows used to request reports.

resource group. A collection of network resources that

are identified as belonging to a particular department

or division. Resources are organized into groups to

reflect the structure of an organization.

resource information. Environment information that

describes the elements in a network.

retention period. The period of time a Tivoli Decision

Support for z/OS database table retains data before

purging it.

T

target. In an update definition, the DB2 table in which

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS stores data from the

source record or table.

threshold. The maximum or minimum acceptable

level of utilization. Utilization measurements are

compared with threshold levels.

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database. A set of

DB2 tables that contain the environment information

and performance data used by Tivoli Decision Support

for z/OS to generate reports.

185

186 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

Index

Aaccessibility xii

administrationdefinition 6

dialog functions 61

dialog tasks, overview 67

dialog, need for 61

overview 61

Primary Option window 69

process 9

alternate resource group 17

alternate resource name 17

application resources 88

application synonym, need for 18

availabilityincluding resources in processing 19, 30

including resources in reporting 20, 30

planning tasks 30

availability category 4

AVAILABILITY_PARM table 25

CChange Application Resource Data window 90

Change Cluster Resource Data window 94

change commandsdeleteall 87

save 86

Change Cross-connection Resource Data window 95

Change function key 85

Change Group Resource Data window 96

Change Line Resource Data window 93

Change Local Resource Data window 97

Change NCP Resource Data window 92

Change Resource Data window 82

Change Switched Resource Data window 98

cluster resources 88

code, installing 49

collect interval 39

componentsinformation category list 10

installing 50

list 4

planning for 10, 11

Components window 50

Configuration component 32

Confirm Changes pop-up 90

Confirm Selection pop-up 98

Create a Database Update Job window 74

cross-connection resources, availability planning 32

cross-domain connection synonym 19

cross-network connection synonym 19

customer support xii

customizing NetView and NPM 141, 145

NetViewavailability component 31

NV/SM utilization component 40

RTM response time component 34

NPMFrame Relay utilization component 43

customizing NetView and NPM (continued)NPM (continued)

LAN utilization component 43, 47

line utilization component 38

NCP utilization component 39

NEO utilization component 41

NPM transit time component 36

NTRI utilization component 42

ODLC utilization component 44

VTAM utilization component 44

X.25 utilization component 46

Ddata

domain 2 data 131

loading from a multiple-domain network 75

loading from a single network domain 68

loading from an external source 102

loading into the NW_RESOURCE table 68

loading process diagram 102

databaseupdating 73

day type, identifying 22

DAY_OF_WEEK table 22

default valuesin lookup tables 14

deleteall command 87

deleting resource entriesin groups 87

individually 86

describing resourcesfor availability 30

for frame relay utilization 43

for NCP utilization 38

for NEO utilization 40

for NPM transit time 35

for NTRI utilization 42

for ODLC utilization 44

for RTM response time 33

for X.25 utilization 45

domain 2 data 131

EEdit resource defaults window 71, 103

environment dataloading from an external source 102

loading from STATMON 68

modifying 77

planning for 14

role of 6

exported datadata set naming convention 107

Ffile transfer category 4

Frame Relay utilization component 42

FTP component, planning for 32

187

function keysCancel 87

Change 85

Search1 82

Search2 83

Gglobal search character 83

groups, resourcealternate 17

establishing 16

planning for componentsavailability 30

NCP utilization 38

NPM transit time 35

RTM response time 33

Iincluding resources

in availability processing 10, 19, 30

in availability reporting 20, 30

information categories 4

list of components 10

selecting 10

installationof code 10

of components 50

installation and administration process 9

Installation Options pop-up 51

interval, collect 39

LLAN utilization component 43, 46

line resources 88

Line utilization component 36

Load Options window 72

loadingdata from a multiple-domain network 75

data from a single network domain 68

LookAt message retrieval tool xi

lookup tablesAVAILABILITY_PARM 25

DAY_OF_WEEK 22

NW_ALERT_DESC 28

NW_ALERT_TYPE 27

NW_FAILURE_CODE 28

NW_GENERAL_CAUSE 27

NW_PROBABLE_CAUSE 28

NW_PRODUCT_ID 26

NW_SPECIFIC_CAUSE 27

NW_THRESHOLD 41

PERIOD_PLAN 23

SCHEDULE 24

SPECIAL_DAY 22

Lookup Tables pop-up 52

Mmaintenance

of environment information 14

MAPSESS definition 34

message retrieval tool, LookAt xi

Nname

NetView 39

NPM 39

names, resourcealternate 17

synonym 18

planning for availability 31

planning for frame relay utilization 43

planning for NCP utilization 38

planning for NEO utilization 40

planning for NPM transit time 35

planning for NTRI utilization 42

planning for ODLC utilization 44

planning for RTM response time 33

planning for X.25 utilization 45

NCP synonym names 19

NCP utilization component 38

NEO utilization component 40

NetView FTP component 32

network environmentdata from STATMON 68

Network Performance featureadministration dialog 61

overview 2

task list 7

normal operation 112

NPMcustomization for components

Frame Relay utilization 43

LAN utilization 43, 47

line utilization 38

NCP utilization 39

NEO utilization 41

NPM transit time 36

NTRI utilization 42

ODLC utilization 44

VTAM utilization 44

X.25 utilization 46

customizing 31

interval, defining 34

name 39

synonym conversions 18, 40

NPM internal utilization component 39

NPM transit time 34

NTRI utilization component 42

NW_ALERT_DESC table 28

NW_ALERT_TYPE table 27

NW_FAILURE_CODE table 29, 33

NW_GENERAL_CAUSE table 27

NW_PROBABLE_CAUSE table 28

NW_PRODUCT_ID table 26, 32

NW_SPECIFIC_CAUSE table 27

NW_THRESHOLD tableline utilization 37

NEO utilization 40

planning 22

X.25 utilization 45

NWPROBLEM18 report 32

Oobjectives, service level

planning for availability 31

planning for NPM transit time 35

planning for RTM response time 33

188 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

ODLC utilization component 44

online publications xii

ordering publications xii

overview, administration dialog tasks 67

PPCLASS definition 34

period information 22

PERIOD_PLAN table 23

planningcomponent tasks, planning for

Availability 30

Configuration 32

frame relay utilization 42

LAN utilization 43, 46

Line utilization 36

NCP utilization 38

NEO utilization 40

NetView FTP 32

NPM internal utilization 39

NPM transit time 34

NTRI utilization 42

ODLC utilization 44

Problem 32

PU utilization 39

RTM response time 33

Service level 36

Session failure 33

Session Monitor utilization 39

summary list 11

X.25 utilization 44

environment information, planning forcode conversion 27

maintenance 14

period 22

product ID 26

resource 14

schedule 24

threshold 21

overview 9

pop-up windowsConfirm Changes 90

Confirm Selection 98

Installation Options 51

Lookup Tables 52

problem category 4

Problem component 32

PU utilization component 39

Rreplacement string 86

resource data, sources of 15

resource groupsalternate 17

establishing 16

planning for componentsavailability 30

NCP utilization 38

NPM transit time 35

RTM response time 33

resource typesrequired for components 16

resourcesapplication 88

resources (continued)changing 87, 98

cluster 88

connections between 20

defining synonym names 18

deleting 86

describing 15

for availability 30

for frame relay utilization 43

for NCP utilization 38

for NEO utilization 40

for NPM transit time 35

for NTRI utilization 42

for ODLC utilization 44

for RTM response time 33

for X.25 utilization 45

grouping 16

line 88

sources for resource data 15

types required for components 15

response time category 4

RTM response time component 33

SSave command 86

SCHEDULE table 24

schedules, planning for availability 31

search character 84

search pattern 85

Search1 function key 82

Search2 function key 83

service componentsources of data 10

service leveland thresholds 21

criteria to establish 20

establishing 20

service level categorydependencies on other components 36

overview 4

service objectives 87

planning for availability 31

planning for NPM transit time 35

planning for RTM response time 33

Session failure component 33

session monitor 39

Set Defaults and Load Resource Data window 70

Set Global Change Values window 86

Set Search1 Values window 82

Set Search2 Values window 84

SMFspecifying NetView FTP record type 32

SMP/E, in installation 49

software support xii

SPECIAL_DAY table 22

STATMON datacreating as environment data 68

loading into Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS 69

STATOPT=OMIT 69

synonym namefor applications 18

for cross-domain connections 19

for NCPs 19

planning for componentsavailability 31

Frame Relay utilization 43

Index 189

synonym name (continued)planning for components (continued)

NCP utilization 38

NEO utilization 40

NPM transit time 35

NTRI utilization 42

ODLC utilization 44

RTM response time 33

X.25 utilization 45

Tthresholds

setting, lookup table 21

task list, Network Performance feature 7

types of resources 15

verifyingline utilization component 37

NEO utilization component 40

X.25 utilization component 45

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Network Administration

window 69

Uupdating Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS database 73

utilization category 4

frame relay utilization 42

LAN utilization 43, 46

Line utilization 36

NCP utilization 38

NEO utilization 40

NPM internal utilization 39

NTRI utilization 42

ODLC utilization 44

PU utilization 39

Session Monitor utilization 39

VTAM utilization 44

X.25 utilization 44

VVTAM names, and synonyms 18

VTAM utilization component 44

VTAMLST statementsas STATMON input data 69

Wwildcard 83

windowsChange Application Resource Data 90

Change Cluster Resource Data 94

Change Cross-connection Resource Data 95

Change Group Resource Data 96

Change Local Resource Data 97

Change NCP Resource Data 92, 93

Change Resource Data 82

Change Switched Resource Data 98

Components 50

Create a Database Update Job 74

Edit resource defaults 71, 103

Load Options 72

Set Defaults and Load Resource Data 70

Set Global Change Values 86

windows (continued)Set Search1 Values 82

Set Search2 Values 84

Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS Network

Administration 69

XX.25 utilization component 44

190 Tivoli Decision Support for z/OS: Network Performance Feature Installation and Administration

����

Program Number: 5698-A07

Printed in USA

SH19-6901-08

Spine information:

��

Tivo

li D

ecis

ion

Supp

ort f

or z/

OS

Net

wor

k Pe

rfor

man

ce Fe

atur

e In

stal

latio

n an

d Ad

min

istr

atio

n Ve

rsio

n 1.

7